The URL can be used to link to this page

Volume 2 of 5 Project Specifications (Div. 1-16) Key West International Airport Noise Insulation Program Construction of Key West by the Sea — Final Phase Volume 2of5 Project Specifications (Divisions 1 -16) KeyWest International Airport Prepared for: THE MONROE COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS Mr. David Rice, District 4 Mayor Mr. Craig Cates, District 1 Mayor Pro-Tem Ms. Michelle Coldiron, District 2 Commissioner Vacant Until Filled, District 3 Commissioner Ms. Holly Raschein, District 5 Commissioner Prepared by: THC. Inc. 3300 Breckinridge Blvd., Suite 200 Duluth, Georgia, 30096 In Association with: The Sun Group, Inc. Jones & Conde, LLC. Gallagher Bassett Technical Services March 2022 Key West International Airport Noise Insulation Program Construction of Key West by the Sea—Final Phase TABLE OF CONTENTS -VOLUME 2 of 5 - PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS Division 1 -General Requirements Section 01100 Summary Section 01140 Work Restrictions Section 01250 Contract Modification Procedures Section 01290 Payment Procedures Section 01310 Project Management and Coordination Section 01320 Construction Progress Documentation Section 01330 Submittal Procedures Section 01400 Quality Requirements Section 01420 References Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01600 Product Requirements Section 01700 Execution Requirements Section 01731 Cutting and Patching Section 01732 Selective Demolition Section 01770 Closeout Procedures Section 01781 Project Record Documents Division 2 -Site Work (Not Used) Division 3 -Concrete Section 03301 Miscellaneous Concrete Division 4 - Masonry Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies Division 5 - Metals (Not Used) Division 6 -Woods and Plastics Section 06100 Rough Carpentry Section 06200 Finish Carpentry Division 7 -Thermal and Moisture Protection Section 07920 Joint Sealants TABLE OF CONTENTS Key West International Airport Noise Insulation Program Construction of Key West by the Sea—Final Phase Division 8 - Doors and Windows Section 08120 Aluminum Swinging Prime Entry Doors Section 08163 Acoustical Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors Section 08215 Wood Doors and Frames Section 08520 Acoustical Aluminum Windows Section 08710 Door Hardware Division 9 - Finishes Section 09220 Portland Cement Plaster Section 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 09911 Painting Division 10 -Specialties (Not Used) Divisions 11 -14 (Not Used) Division 15- Mechanical Section 15010 Mechanical General Requirements Section 15100 HVAC Systems Division 16- Electrical Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 01100 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification:The Work under this contract consists of all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for making improvements to the acoustical performance of the properties listed herein. B. Project Location and Participating Units: Key West by the Sea Final Phase — 18 Units Group 1 - Unit Numbers (4 Units): A101, A201, A401, A603, Group 2 - Unit Numbers (14 "Clean Up" Units): KWBTS Building A A208, A605 KWBTS Building B B105, B208, B307, B309, B405, B601, B607, B611 KWBTS Building C C115, C211, C219, C317S Note: Group 2 Units represent alternate units which may be excluded, in part or in whole, from the Contract if the total bid exceeds available FAA project funding. The order of prioritization of award for Group 2 units will be non-sequential and in the order listed in the Electronic Bid Sheets. C. Sponsor: Key West International Airport/Monroe County, FL D. Program Manager: Prime Consultant THC, Inc 3300 Breckinridge Blvd. Suite 200 Duluth, GA 30096 In Association with the following firms: Architect The Sun Group, Inc. 820 W. Indiantown Road, Suite 105 Jupiter, FL 33458 SUMMARY 01100 - 1 Mechanical Electrical Engineer Jones &Conde, LLC 4440 PGA Blvd., Suite 600 Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33410 Environmental Consultant Gallagher Bassett Technical Services 4350 W. Cypress Street—Suite 300 Tampa, Florida 33607 E. Description of Work: 1. The Work is generally described as building construction and replacement work necessary to improve the noise insulation of 18 condominium properties in Building A, B & C of the Key West by the Sea Condominium (KWBTS) in Key West, Florida. 2. The overall objective of the Sponsor is to achieve quantitative noise reductions in selected properties most affected by the aircraft operations. Toward this end, the program provides for the improvement of openings in the exterior envelope using known technology and quality workmanship. The purpose of this project is to account for existing noise and demonstrate the benefits in noise reduction that have occurred based on the improvements in the building envelope that were made. Sound testing will occur when the building envelope improvements are completed. Small openings, cracks, and gaps can be significant sound leaks and effect test results. Special attention will be given to caulking where called for, as well as careful alignment of building elements. 3. Key West by the Sea (KWBTS) is an environmentally sensitive, multi-family gated residential condominium. During the scheduled construction of each individual condominium unit, the property owner or tenant will relocate during their assigned construction period. When developing the detailed construction schedule, the Contractor is encouraged to minimize the number of calendar days of construction in each condominium unit to reduce the property owner's total relocation time. The remainder of KWBTS buildings must remain fully accessible and operational during the progress of the work. The KWBTS scope of work includes, but is not limited to, exterior window replacement, exterior prime door replacement; exterior sliding glass patio door replacement, removal and infill of"through-wall" portable air conditioning units, addition of ductless AC system, addition of Energy Recovery Ventilator(ERV) unit and all work related to the installation of the ductless air conditioners and ERV to include electrical panel modifications, cutting and SUMMARY 01100 - 2 repair of gypsum ceilings, construction of wall pilasters to house required ducts and lines and required finishing work to include stucco repair and painting. The Contractor will be required to perform asbestos remediation in each of the properties at that particular area and/or surfaces according to the Volume 3—Asbestos&Lead Based Paint Inspection Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 4. This work shall include all related work incidental to the above-described work, the Contractor shall carefully examine the work site and base his/her proposal on a thorough investigation of existing conditions and how existing conditions will affect the work. 5. Upon contract award, the Contractor will be required to develop a detailed construction schedule for all participating properties to complete the required scope of work within the project contract time. Upon completion, the Contractor will be required to submit their proposed construction schedule to the Program Manager for final approval. 6. This project will require Program Manager approval of work plans for all on-site activities. Items requiring pre-approval include but are not limited to: maintenance of traffic plan, equipment locations, temporary and semi-permanent lifts, building access, on-site storage, weekday and weekend work schedules, access coordination plans for non- participating KWBTS property owners on active construction floors, nighttime security, detailed subcontractor phasing and schedule coordination, fully manned safety barricading, employee testing requirements (criminal background check, drug testing), worker badging requirements and numerous other specialized working conditions will be required to work at this facility. The Bidder shall account for all specialized conditions in his bid. For a detailed summary of Contractor requirements, see KW NIP Final Phase Construction Safety and Phasing Plan. 1.02 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract. (See 01100-Section 1.07 Time of Completion) 1.03 SUBCONTRACTING A. The Contractor shall not sublet any part of the Contract except as permitted herein or approved by the Sponsor. Refer to Volume 1 Division I Section B-Instruction to Bidders Article 23 titled "Subletting or Assigning of Contract". B. Unless otherwise stipulated in the proposal or special provisions and with the assistance of workmen under his/her immediate superintendence and reported on his/her payroll, contract work of a value not less than fifteen percent (15%) of the total contract amount must be performed by the General Contractor. C. The Contractor may sublet to not more than one subcontractor: 1. For each category listed: a. Cleaning b. Prime Entry Doors C. Acoustical Sliding Glass Patio Doors d. Acoustical Windows e. Stucco SUMMARY 01100 - 3 f. Painting g. Gypsum Board & Metal Framing h. Masonry i. HVAC (Ductless AC System& ERV Unit) j. Electrical k. Asbestos Remediation D. The Contractor shall not sublet any part of this Contract without the permission of the Sponsor. The Contractor shall notify the Program Manager of any changes to the Subcontractor list provided in his/her Bid. Contractors shall notify the Program Manager of new subcontractors to perform work on site and shall not allow subcontractors to begin work until program standards are met and Sponsor approval is received. E. The Contractor shall not allow a subcontractor to sublet any part of this Contract to a sub- subcontractor. F. Contractor may sublet installations to product suppliers. However, if the Contractor subcontracts installation to the supplier, that supplier may not further sublet installation to another subcontractor. G. The Contractor shall verify prior to starting the work that each Subcontractor meets all project requirements; including but not limited to: insurance, employee drug testing and background checks, badging. The Contractor shall also verify that the sub-contractors have the current Construction Documents including all Addenda. H. The Contractor is fully responsible to the Sponsor for the acts and omissions of the Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them. The determination that a subcontractor is eligible to work in the NIP by the Sponsor or the Program Manager shall not be construed as an endorsement of the subcontractor. I. The Contractor agrees to bind every Subcontractor by the terms of these Contract Documents, in written Contract form, signed by both parties. J. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor and the Sponsor. 1.04 ASSIGNMENTS A. No assignment by the Contractor of any principal construction Contract or any part thereof,will be recognized except upon the written notice of approval of the Sponsor and the surety. Such assignment shall specify the purpose for which the assignment is given. 1.05 CONTRACTOR PRE-QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS (TRAINING) A. The Contractor is required to contact the Program Manager prior to beginning any construction. During the construction period, the Contractor and all Subcontractors will be closely reviewed by the Program Manager. In the event of unsatisfactory performance,the Sponsor retains sole discretion and authority to remove any Contractor from a Work-Site and complete the Work. SUMMARY 01100 - 4 1.06 COMPLIANCE WITH PROJECT MANUAL A. Contractors, subcontractors and suppliers who violate any part of this Project Manual shall be subject to penalties and/or restrictions as determined by the Sponsor. 1.07 TIME OF COMPLETION A. All work under this Contract shall be entirely completed within Two Hundred Fifty-Eight (258) Total Calendar Days. B. The standard work week is 8am-5:00pm, Monday through Saturday, in which conditions under control of the Contractor will permit construction operations to proceed with the Contractor's normal working force engaged in performing the controlling items(s) of work. In addition, the Contractor will have the availability to work at KWBTS on Sundays (8am-5pm). Sunday work hours shall be limited to interior quiet work only. C. Conditions considered to be beyond the Contractor's control are those which could not be foreseen at the time of bidding or are beyond the power of the Contractor to control or prevent, although an extension request must still be requested. Those conditions include: 1. Periods of inclement weather conditions or other unfavorable site conditions that are, in the opinion of the Program Manager, unsuitable for construction operations. 2. Strikes not caused by improper acts or omissions by the Contractor. 3. Delays caused by the Sponsor, Program Manager or Property Owner other than specified herein. D. Conditions considered to be under control of the Contractor are those which could be foreseen at the time of bidding or were in his power to control or prevent. These conditions or circumstances include: 1. Delays due to the Contractor's failure to provide sufficient forces and equipment to maintain satisfactory progress in completing the progress-controlling items of work. 2. Delays due to slow delivery of materials from the supplier or fabricator when the material was available in warehouse stock, or when delivery was delayed for reasons of priority, late ordering, financial considerations, incorrect product order,or other causes within the power of the Contractor to avoid. 3. Delays caused by plant and equipment failures of less than four hours duration,or at any time when the delay is due to the Contractor's failure to provide and maintain equipment in good mechanical condition, or to provide for immediate emergency repairs. 4. Work performed by a subcontractor of the Contractor shall be considered within the control of the Contractor. E. The Contractor shall list specific dates and reasons for delays in writing to the Program Manager for consideration. 1.08 WORK SEQUENCE: COMMENCEMENT, SCHEDULE AND COMPLETION OF WORK A. The work (the "Project") will consist of providing acoustical treatment to multiple individually owned properties. To limit the number of units affected by the work at any one time, the work shall progress contiguously thru the building by order of unit number starting with properties with the highest unit numbers. The work shall begin in Building A,then Building B then Building C. All work in one building shall be completed before progressing to the next building. SUMMARY 01100 - 5 There shall be no more than six (6) units under construction at one time which have not reached final completion. (The Program Manager will have the ability to increase the maximum number of units open from six to eight depending on the Contractor's demonstrating sufficient staffing, efficiencies and worker abilities.) The Work shall be completed within a Total Contract Time comprised of a Product Procurement Period and Construction Period as follows: Total Contract Time: 258 Calendar Days Pre-Construction Period 9/28/2022-1/23/2023 (118 Calendar Days) Notice to Proceed-Permits September 28, 2022 Preconstruction Meeting and Contractor Measurement Walk September 28-30, 2022 Shop Drawings &Submittal Review September 30- November 15, 2022 Product Procurement November 16, 2022- January 24, 2023 Mobilize and Prepare Site January 10-23, 2023 Construction Period 1/24/2023-6/12/2023 (140 Calendar Days) Notice to Proceed-Construction January 24, 2023 Construction 18 Units - January 24—May 29, 2023 Post Construction/Closeout (14 Calendar Days) May 30-June 12, 2023 B. Following the execution of the Contract, the Contractor will be issued a Notice to Proceed- Permits which will start the Project Time (see Volume 1-Division IV-Special Provisions No. 2). The Notice to Proceed-Permits shall permit the taking of measurements, preparation of shop drawings, permitting and the procurement of materials. The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in a written Notice to Proceed. C. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed Construction Schedule (Gantt-chart) in electronic PDF format, based on the above parameters showing all specified items and required submittals for approval by the Program Manager prior to the commencement of the work. D. The Contractor shall attend a multi-day"Pre-Construction Measurement Visit" at which time a visit to each Property will occur for the purpose of taking detailed measurements, verification of existing conditions. The Contractor shall be required to have a representative from the major manufacturers for Doors /Windows, and the mechanical and electrical subcontractors accompany them on the "Pre-Construction Measurement Visit" Meeting with the Program Manager and Property Owner for all Properties in the package, which shall be in conjunction with the Contractor taking site dimensions.The"Pre-Construction Measurement Visit"Meeting shall be scheduled by the Program Manager. All outstanding construction issues that could potentially affect the construction schedule and any discrepancies found between the documents and the actual conditions will be identified at this time, evaluated and incorporated SUMMARY 01100 - 6 in a Change Order. They will be reflected in the shop drawing process for the Program Manager's review. E. When measuring for replacement window / door units, confirming installation details or as directed by the Program Manager, the Contractor shall remove exterior or interior finishes as required to verify the rough opening dimensions. New units shall be sized to fit rough opening pursuant to agreed upon installation detail. No downsizing of windows or doors shall be permitted. Contractor to re-install/patch and repair trim once measurements have been taken. F. The Construction Period shall not commence until the Sponsor has issued a written "Notice to Proceed-Construction". Measurements, submittals and shop drawings shall be submitted and approved prior to the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall begin the Work to be performed under the Contract within five (5)days of the date set by the Sponsor in the Notice to Proceed, but in any event,the Contractor shall notify the Program Manager at least forty-eight(48)hours in advance of the time actual construction operations will begin. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. G. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Program Manager to schedule and conduct a "Forty- Eight Hour Pre-Construction Walk-Through" Meeting 48 hours in advance of the construction start date for each individual Property. (See Volume 2 of 5 Section 01310 Project Management &Coordination 1.07 F) H. No work at the site,or storage of materials thereon,will be permitted prior to fourteen (14)days before the scheduled start of construction. After such time, all work at the site, or storage of materials thereon, may be performed in accordance with Section 01140 Work Restrictions. I. It is anticipated that the given time for completion of the work under this contract is more than adequate and that the work will be performed only during those days and hours as indicated. J. The objective is to make all improvements to each building as specified in these Documents with the minimum inconvenience to the Property Owners. K. Liquidated damages have been included in this Contract as provided in the Agreement. For each day after the scheduled Completion Date any part of the Work remains incomplete, the Contractor shall incur liquidated damages in the amount of:$1,000.00 per calendar day. (See Special Provisions No. 3) L. The Sponsor reserves the right if the Contractor is not performing, to assume the work, or portions of the work and deduct the value based on the associate actual costs. M. All scheduling shall be coordinated through the Program Manager and the Property Owner. It will be necessary to alter schedules to suit the availability of Property Owner or its residents. N. During the construction period,the Contractor shall reach Final Completion on all condominium properties within a not-to-exceed time period of: Twenty (20) consecutive calendar days after starting work in each property with no Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM), Twenty-Five (25) consecutive calendar days after starting work in each property with either interior or exterior ACM and Thirty (30)consecutive calendar days after starting work in each property with ACM in both interior and exterior surfaces. The construction duration for a unit may be extended by one day if the City of Key West is closed during a weekday Holiday and the Contractor is unable to have completed work inspected. SUMMARY 01100 - 7 O. Punch list items shall be addressed immediately by the Contractor at each building upon receipt of a written list from the Program Manager. Once the punch list is complete, the Program Manager will schedule the final inspection. P. Any alteration in schedule must be approved by the Program Manager at least seven (7)days prior to its rescheduled commencement. Q. Final Inspection: The Contractor shall notify the Program Manager when the punch-list is complete and the building is ready for final inspection. The Program Manager shall schedule and coordinate a final inspection with the Program Manager, Property Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Superintendent and a carpenter at the final inspection to verify completion and take care of any unresolved issues. The Contractor shall provide the record drawings (with all changes annotated)and photographs for review at the final inspection. R. Acoustical Post Testing. After the Final Inspection when the Program Manager has certified completion,the building may be acoustically post tested. Should the improvements fail to meet the acoustical objectives known for a specific treatment, the Program Manager may order further corrective measures to be undertaken by the Contractor. Testing will be performed by the Program Manager. 1.09 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system. B. Specification Content:The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms,words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.10 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. The Contract work shall require the removal, alteration or disposal of regulated asbestos- containing materials. Such materials may include exterior stucco, gypsum board, joint compound, and Skim coats (applied texturing). The Contractor shall perform the work in accordance with Volume 3 of 5 Asbestos&Lead Based Paint Inspection Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specification and with all applicable local, state and federal regulations regarding such work. SUMMARY 01100 - 8 1.11 LEAD PAINT A. Lead Paint may be present at doors, windows, woodwork, and other materials that may be disturbed by the work of this Contract. The Contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the Toxic Substances Control Act, Section 406 b, including but not limited to,the procurement and distribution of the lead hazard information pamphlet "Renovate Right: Information for Families, Child Care providers and Schools"as referenced therein and at no additional cost to the Sponsor. The Pre-Renovation Notification form shall be used to document notification efforts. The Contractor shall obtain copies of all signed Pre-Renovation Notifications Forms and submit in electronic PDF format to the Program Manager. B. The Contractor shall make advance notifications to Property Owners and tenants no more than sixty (60) days prior to commencement of renovation activities. Advance notifications shall include any renovation activities that were previously canceled or postponed during the prior 60-day notification period. The Contractor shall obtain copies of all signed Renovation Notice forms and submit in electronic PDF format to the Program Manager. C. Measures to control stray dust and chips shall be practiced. Such measures shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. The wetting down of all work surfaces prior to scoring/cutting. 2. The wetting down of all work surfaces requiring significant demolition prior to commencement. 3. Turning off ventilation systems prior to construction. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION A. Pollution of natural resources such as air, soil or water by operations under this Contract shall be prevented, controlled and abated in accordance with all local, state and federal rules, regulations and standards. 1.13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Furniture Moving: The Contractor shall include in his/her bid up to 2 hours of labor in each unit, for the purpose of moving furniture and personal items out of work areas covered under this Contract. B. Disturbances: The committing of nuisances on the subject properties and adjacent property shall be rigorously prohibited and adequate steps shall be taken to prevent it. Any employee found violating this provision shall be discharged and not employed again on work under this Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100 - 9 SECTION 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 USE OF PREMISES A. Key West by the Sea is smoke-free. Smoking or the use of any other tobacco products will not be permitted on the Property (including on-site Contractor Staging Areas). Alcohol, weapons, or illegal substances of any kind will not be permitted on the Property. Any persons found to be in possession of these items in person or in their vehicles will be immediately escorted off the property and permanently barred from returning. Worker's must be actively performing a task when on site. Loitering in vehicles or in or around buildings will not be permitted. All breaks will be taken within designated fenced staging area or off-site. The use of building facilities, common areas, vending machines, etc. is prohibited. Workers must demonstrate good conduct at all times. Foul language, conduct, inappropriate clothing, jewelry or markings will not be permitted. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Property Owner Occupancy: Allow for operation and occupancy of site in all areas not actively under construction. 2. Drives and Entrances: Keep drives and building entrances clear and available to Property Owner, Occupant, Guests, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Use only designated areas for storage of materials and equipment. See Contractor staging area shown on the Drawings. C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather-tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. D. Elevator: The Contractor shall be permitted to use existing building elevators for worker transport during construction subject to the following conditions: a. KWBTS Management has agreed to allow the use of the elevator for Contractor's Personnel (Workers)with stipulations. b. Workers must wear a mask or face covering when in or around the elevator. C. Only two (2)Workers are allowed in the elevator at one time. d. Workers cannot ride the elevator along with Residents and must exit immediately when elevator stops on a floor and a resident is waiting to ride. WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 1 e. If a resident is using the elevator, Workers are to by-pass the elevator until it is clear. f. No tools, equipment, supplies or debris will be permitted to be transported in the elevator. E. Sanitation: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining adequate portable toilet facilities for its work crews, suppliers and those of its subcontractors. The portable toilets shall be frequently serviced to prevent odors and nuisance. The quantity of portable toilet facilities, their locations and maintenance schedules shall be submitted to the Program Manager for approval. The use of any other on-site toilet facilities or building grounds is expressly prohibited. F. Water and Electricity: Water and electricity as may be required by the Contractor or by Subcontractors during the progress of the work, will be available on site. The use of those utilities shall be in a manner acceptable to the Program Manager and Property Owner. All utilities required for the required Temporary Field Office will be the responsibility of the Contractor. G. Debris and Surplus Material: All debris and waste material, scrap or salvageable material generated by the construction shall be removed by the Contractor to a designated on-site containment area on a daily basis. Reference Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. H. Debris shall not be permitted to accumulate, and the work shall be kept satisfactorily clean at all times. The Contractor shall provide clean-up of all areas that its work or Subcontractors has dirtied to a vacuum clean condition at the end of each day. The Contractor shall make the utmost efforts to keep all areas of work and circulation clean, to cause the least possible disruption to building occupants. Failure of the Contractor to provide satisfactory cleaning may result in the Sponsor or the Program Manager to direct others to clean up at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide temporary floor covering to protect floors at entries, paths to work areas, and work areas. The Contractor shall also provide temporary covering to protect furniture in work areas. I. Temporary Scaffolding: The Contractor may erect temporary fixed scaffolding along the balcony side and end wall building facades to facilitate working access to above grade floors. Scaffolding shall be limited to only cover the units currently under construction, and those units which are contiguous and shall be removed after the last unit in that grouping have reached final completion. The Contractor shall determine the scope and quantity of scaffolding required to safely perform the scope of work. The Contractor shall meet all OSHA requirements and submit proposed layout drawings showing dates and durations of scaffolding which coincide with the approved construction schedule for Program Manager's review and approval. The Contractor shall provide all necessary protections and site restoration necessary to minimize and repair all damages caused by his/her operations. J. Materials Transport and Loading: Construction materials may be loaded from the parking lot side onto the building walkways using a forklift with an extendable boom to reach up to six stories. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions including but not limited to flag personnel, safety barricading and building protections to prevent injury to persons and property and maintenance of traffic. Prior to the start of construction activities, the Contractor shall provide a written /graphic plan for materials transport and loading for approval by the Program Manager. K. The project will requires the contractor to sequence the completion of construction work on a "building by building" basis (beginning with Building A), which will require 3 separate mobilizations of asbestos abatement and construction crews at each KWBTS building. Work at WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 -2 each building must be fully completed and grounds restored prior to start of work at the subsequent buildings. 1.02 SECURITY BADGING, BACKGROUND CHECK AND DRUG TESTING REQUIREMENTS See Volume 1 of 5 Special Provisions 12 for requirements of this Section. 1.03 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Occupancy: The Property Owner will fully occupy site and existing building during entire construction period (with the exception of those specific KWBTS units under construction). The Contractor shall perform the Work so as not to interfere with the occupant's operations. The Contractor shall schedule his work such that the buildings remain in an occupiable condition with all utilities and services provided. Portions of the building not actively being worked on must remain accessible and fully operational. Maintain safe egress paths to all exit stairs and elevators. Any temporary shut-down of building services must be restored as soon as possible and at the end of each work day. The utmost in cooperation with the Property Owner is required during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate occupant usage. B. Special Work Hours: See Section 1.08. 1.04 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. At all times, the Contractor will be required to store at minimum, two (2) weeks of required window and door products and supplies on-site in secure modular steel storage containers. The Contractor may secure an off-site warehouse for the storage of all other window and door products and supplies which cannot be accommodated on-site. Storage of materials and equipment for this work shall be permitted solely at the Contractor's risk and shall be limited to areas specified in the Specification and reviewed by the Program Manager. No liability or responsibility for said on-site and off-site storage shall be placed on the Sponsor. B. Store products in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Products shall be grouped by address for verification purposes. 1.05 PROTECTION AND SAFETY BARRICADING A. The buildings and premises included in the scope of this Contract are currently occupied. The work is to be done with as little inconvenience as reasonably possible and without danger to persons visiting or occupying the premises and the permanent structures within the project area. Special care must be exercised in the use of machinery so as not to constitute a source of danger or nuisance. When regulated by local building code or other authority, such requirements for protections shall be considered as minimum requirements and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing protection to meet such minimum requirements as may be required by public safety laws. B. Protective measures will be required to adequately protect the Property Owners, KWBTS staff, occupants and the general public from hazards resulting from contract work, to exclude unauthorized persons from the work, and shall be provided and maintained in good repair by the Contractor. All work areas shall be barricaded and fully manned to maintain traffic away from work areas. Work in progress shall not be left unattended until that portion of the work is complete and the work area is cleaned and suitable for occupancy. Workers shall maintain WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 3 sight of all tools and materials to prevent accidental injury. Unattended tools or power operated equipment will be promptly removed by the Program Manager and will not be returned until the end of the work day. C. Prior to construction, the Program Manager will develop a "Designated Furniture Storage Sketch" for each condominium based specifically on its proposed scope of work. This sketch will define the areas within the Living Room and Bedrooms that the Property Owner will have the ability to store furniture and belongings, utilizing the space from floor to ceiling. Generally, this sketch will also define a "work clear area" for the Contractor that provides a 3-foot clearance from all windows, a 5-foot clearance from sliding patio doors and a 5-foot clearance for a corridor that spans the entire length of the condominium from the entry door through the living room to provide access for ceiling cuts. The Property Owner will be required to provide a space of 12" from all walls when stacking furniture in their "Designated Furniture Storage Sketch" areas. D. The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain temporary impact &dust protection in the form of 3 mil. polyethylene sheeting (poly), canvas tarps, floor pads, drop cloths or other appropriate items to minimize both damage and dust infiltration to the premises and its contents. The Contractor is required to provide sealed poly protection in numerous areas in the interior of the condominium to include, but not limited to: stored furniture, entrances to bathrooms, closet doors, smoke alarms, Ductless AC Units, kitchen cabinets and countertops, walls and lighting fixtures, etc. The Contractor is required to provide protection to all floors and walls in the condominium to prevent marking and damage. E. The Contractor shall take special measures to protect the occupants from noise, dust, and other disturbances. Complete the following on a daily basis: 1. Keep common circulation areas clean and unobstructed throughout the day. 2. Insulate work areas from occupied portions as far as possible. 3. Seal dust and fumes from contaminating the adjacent and occupied spaces. 4. Remove all dirt, dust, and debris created by the work of the Contract on the premises by cleaning, vacuuming, and washing as required and as directed, in order to leave the site in as clean a condition as existed prior to the start of the work. 5. Clean work areas at the end of each day with a HEPA-filtered vacuum. F. The Contractor shall take special measures to protect product, integrity of installations, and occupants from inclement weather conditions with reference to, but not limited to the following: 1. All exposed openings not in progress of work are to be protected with 6 mil poly vapor barriers to prevent excessive conditioned air loss and secure against inclement weather. 2. Sealant and caulking when used under the environmental conditions outlined under Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection shall be stored and handled to prevent deterioration by keeping joint substrates and sealers protected and dry as required. 3. The Contractor is solely responsible for maintaining suitable temperature and ventilation for painting and staining work. All wood surfaces are to be pre-painted before installation. No exterior painting/staining shall be undertaken if air or surface temperature is below 50 degrees F nor immediately following rain or until frost, dew, or condensation has evaporated. A minimum interior temperature of 65 degrees F shall be maintained during application and drying of paint. Adequate ventilation shall be maintained at all times. 1.06 CONFLICT OF INTEREST In order to maintain the integrity of the schedule and to keep the lines of responsibility definite, the Contractor agrees not to enter into any contract either verbal or written with the Property Owner, involving the buildings covered by this Contract unless specifically approved otherwise by the Sponsor. This agreement shall remain intact throughout the duration of the Contract. WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 -4 1.07 SCHEDULE A. The Overall Contract has schedule requirements; see Division 1 Section 01100 "Summary" for additional information. B. The Contractor must confirm, in writing to the Program Manager, that all inventory has been received and verified prior to each condominium start. 1.08 SPECIAL WORK HOURS A. All work scheduling must be coordinated with the Program Manager and approved by the Property Owner as part of the Overall Project Schedule. See Section 01100-Summary. Special work hours shall be requested in writing to the Program Manager. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 5 SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01600 "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 2. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 CONTRACTOR COMMUNICATION A. During the designated Contract construction period, the Contractor is required to communicate all approved changes to the construction schedule and/or construction scope of work to the Program Manager before the change occurs. Failure will result in the issuance of two (2) Deficiency Points for every occurrence of miscommunication (see Special Conditions SP-13 Deficiency Points). 1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. The Program Manager will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on the following documents: AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions". 1.04 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS A. The Program Manager will furnish,with reasonable promptness,additional instructions, by means of drawings or otherwise as necessary for the proper execution of the Work. In giving such additional instructions, the Program Manager shall have authority to make minor changes in the Work not involving extra cost and not inconsistent with the intent of the Work. B. All Drawings and instructions shall be consistent with the Contract, the full and true development thereof and reasonably inferable there from. The Contractor shall only perform Work consistent with the Scope of Work. CONTRACT MODIFICATION 01250 - 1 PROCEDURES 1.05 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Program Manager-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Program Manager will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time on AIA Document G709"Proposal Request". If necessary,the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by the Program Manager are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 5 working days after receipt of Proposal Request,submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Clarifications or Changes: If latent or unforeseen conditions require clarifications or modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a written and sequentially numbered 'Request for Interpretation.' 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration,start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 1.06 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. All Proposed Changes requiring adjustment to the Contract Sum must first be submitted and approved by the FAA by implementing guidelines contained in "Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) Airport Improvement Program Construction Project Change Orders" (ARP SOP 07.00 effective Date 10/01/2015), included herein as Exhibit A. B. Change Order(s)will be issued to effect any substantive changes in the Contract such as Contract extensions,substitutions, exceeding the allowance and or as a Final Change Order on completion of the Contract. The Change Order will be issued on "Change Order"AIA G701 and will require signatures by the Program Manager, Contractor and Sponsor. CONTRACT MODIFICATION 01250 -2 PROCEDURES PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION 01250 - 3 PROCEDURES Exhibit A Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) Airport Improvement Program Construction Project Change Orders (ARP SOP 07.00) CONTRACT MODIFICATION 01250 -4 PROCEDURES AV,,ly A • `` FAA 07.00 7 o Airports �fMrs VLac Effective Date: 10/01/2015 Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) Airport Improvement Program Construction Project Change Orders A. PURPOSE The purpose of this SOP is to establish uniform procedures for the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Office of Airports (ARP)that address reviewing and approving Change Orders for airport construction projects. B. SCOPE The scope of this SOP applies to all Change Orders for airport construction projects funded in whole or in part under the Airport Improvement Program (AIP). The scope is limited to the review and approval of Change Orders associated with a project that is underway or with the close-out process at the end of the project. This SOP does not address funding decisions associated with Change Orders. C. CANCELLATION This is the first version of this SOP, so it does not cancel a previous version. D. APPLICABLE REGULATIONS, POLICY,AND GUIDANCE Requirements identified within this SOP originate in or are further described in various FAA publications including Orders,regulations, and Advisory Circulars. See the current versions. 1. Title 2 Code of Federal Re lations 200.3231 2. FAA Order 5100.38, Airport Improvement Program Handbook 3. Advisory Circular 150/5370-10, Standards for Specifying Construction of Airports Title 2 Code of Federal Regulations 200.323 replaced Part 18.36 after December 26,2014. ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 E. AIP CONSTRUCTION PROJECT CHANGE ORDER REQUIREMENTS AND OBJECTIVES The AIP Handbook(FAA Order 5100.38)requires FAA Airports Personnel (FAA Airports specialists or FAA Airports staff in Regional offices and Airport District Offices)to review Change Orders associated with construction contracts. The objective of this SOP is to provide a common understanding, frame of reference, and minimum requirements for the processing of AIP Change Orders by FAA Airports staff. F. LIMITATIONS OF THIS SOP The following limitations apply to this SOP: 1. This SOP only addresses the actions necessary for the review and approval of change orders on AIP-funded construction contracts. 2. This SOP is not applicable to the review and approval of construction Change Orders on Passenger Facility Charge (PFC) funded construction projects. 3. This SOP is not applicable to the review and concurrence of Supplemental Agreements. 4. This SOP addresses procedures for complying with existing FAA policy. This SOP does not establish or modify FAA policy. 5. This SOP will not focus on funding decisions associated with a Change Order. G. IMPLEMENTATION This SOP will be implemented in accordance with FAA Order 5100.38D, Airport Improvement Program Handbook. H. DISTRIBUTION This SOP is distributed to the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Airports Organization (ARP) and all interested parties. The SOP will be available electronically on the Airports section of the FAA website. L CHANGE TABLE Date of SOP Page Reason for Change Change Version Changed I I Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Elliott Black 9/21/2015 Director, Of'ic& irport Planning and Programming Date N , ww Michael J„ 'Donnell 9/14/2015 Director, Office of Airport Safety and Standards Date -fi Byron K. Huffman Carolyn Read Manager, Alaskan Region Airports Division Manager(Acting), Northwest Mountain Region Airports Division Jim A. Johnson Manager, Central Region Airports Division Winsome A. Lenfert Manager, Southern Region Airports R � Division Debbie Roth 1_3 j Manager, Eastern Region Airports Division Ignacio Flores Manager, Southwest Region Airports A ,f Division Susan Mowery-Schalk Manager, Great Lakes Region Airports Division Mark A. McClardy r Manager, Western-Pacific Region Airports r r - °.....,. Division Mary T. Walsh Manager, New England Region Airports Division iii ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 Table of Contents 1. Roles and Responsibilities........................................................................................................ 1 1.1. Airport Sponsor ................................................................................................................1 1.2. FAA Airports Personnel...................................................................................................1 2. Process and Procedures............................................................................................................2 2.1. General Characteristics of Change Orders....................................................................2 2.2. Standard Change Order Process.....................................................................................3 2.2.1. Step 1: Receive Change Order from Sponsor........................................................... 4 2.2.2. Step 2: Screen Change Order for Adequacy of Information..................................... 4 2.2.3. Step 3: Evaluate Change Order for Eligibility..........................................................4 2.2.4. Step 4: Initiate Correspondence for Action Taken ................................................... 6 2.2.5. Step 5: Archive Correspondence in Grant File......................................................... 8 2.3. Emergency Change Order Process..................................................................................8 2.3.1. Step 1: Initial Coordination....................................................................................... 9 2.3.2. Step 2: Follow-On Coordination............................................................................. 10 2.3.3. Step 3: Initial Approval Action............................................................................... 10 2.3.4. Step 4: Revert to Standard Change Order Process.................................................. 10 AppendixA. Glossary...............................................................................................................A-1 AppendixB. Change Order Contents.....................................................................................B-1 Appendix C. Samples of Change Order Correspondence.....................................................C-1 C.1. Sample: Change Order Approval Correspondence.................................................C-1 C.2. Sample: Change Order Disapproval Correspondence............................................C-3 AppendixD. List of Steps.........................................................................................................D-1 D.1. Standard Change Order Process...............................................................................D-1 D.2. Emergency Change Order Process............................................................................D-1 iv Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 1. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES I.I. Airport Sponsor As the recipient of an AIP grant, the airport sponsor must conform to the terms and conditions of the grant agreement and the obligations established under the associated grant assurances. As such, sponsors are the contractual authority that administers any proposed contract Change Order. Sponsors are responsible for settling all contractual and administrative issues that arise from their procurement actions. To remain eligible, such actions must conform to the approved scope of work as defined in the Grant description and the accepted plans and specifications. As they pertain to Change Orders, sponsor responsibilities include: l. Maintaining records that detail the significant history of their procurement actions, including Change Orders. 2. Documenting a clear and accurate description of the technical requirements for the material,product, or service to be procured. 3. Preparing an independent estimate prior to receiving a Change Order proposal from the contractor. 4. Performing some form of a cost or price analysis for all contract modifications. 5. Negotiating profit as a separate element of price for each Change Order in which a cost analysis is necessary. 6. Making available to the FAA specialist all required documentation, which may include additional supporting documentation as requested by the FAA specialist. 7. Providing justification for why the Change Order is necessary for completion of the AIP- funded project. 1.2. FAA Airports Personnel FAA Airports Personnel are responsible for reviewing the sponsor's Change Order request and determining if the Change Order is eligible and justified for potential funding under an AIP grant. Their responsibilities include: 1. Reviewing all Change Orders to determine AIP eligibility. 2. Determining whether a portion of the Change Order cost or associated costs (i.e., design or inspection costs) are due to errors and omissions. 3. Ascertaining whether additional costs are directly related to the approved scope of work and are necessary to accomplish the project. 4. Verifying Change Order elements conform to AIP standards and requirements. 5. Preparing correspondence documenting the FAA specialist's determination of AIP eligibility. 6. Archiving the eligibility decision in the project file. 1 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 2. PROCESS AND PROCEDURES 2.1. General Characteristics of Change Orders Change Orders occur on AIP-funded projects for a variety of reasons. Some Change Order work items may be eligible while other work items may not. Change Order work items that are otherwise allowable under the AIP may become ineligible if the sponsor does not conform to AIP requirements for establishing reasonableness of price. It is the FAA specialist's responsibility to evaluate each Change Order item for AIP eligibility based on • Allowability • Justification • Reasonableness of price Table 2-1 addresses common Change Order types and useful information associated with each type. A sponsor's Change Order may include one or more of the Change Order types depending on the specific Change Order situation. Table 2-1. Types of Change Orders . . � p i u��lll��l��I uuuu m ii uituiu a uu u�u uuui iuui uui a u� uuuu uuou uu uuu uVuuuiuu�u uuui�uuui ui�ui uillliuiu uuui ui uu ui�uiuu�uiiouu�a uu ui�u ui uiii u A5at Prc �� pfal+dcsd quantify sa �easattkste p6 risd'fF �y rtsky'� t (if W&I be/Ji ft� Itc�J1 t estafaf tYrd oI tht rtie ssary tproject lon paro patrtgxttn unrt tc�praa 4lle k3criple UU � S pT tc£'$ r�td a roiud4 � viiiiiiiii " it� If fk 4� andy ntract aascs tat grant, Erfsrb � unrt pncod aaant WorkIem do riot bd s'0bJecf t q rrt y approved 6 adji trr�d�. rnafot ccxrsact II�IIIIII I III ® u • Eligible if within • Additional • The sponsor • The sponsor u ujuq approved scope quantities should needs to perform should establish a of work. be limited to that some form of firm fixed price • Non-participating necessary to price analysis or before starting if outside of complete work as cost analysis. extra work. approved scope intended by The sponsor If uncertain about of work. approved scope. needs to provide the level of effort, • Ineligible if not assurance that it duration,and/or permitted by AIP. conducted a price material costs, or cost analysis. the sponsor • Ineligible if should not permit outside of the establishment approved scope of a firm fixed of work,even if price for the extra increase is due to work. Instead,the favorable bids. sponsor may use a time and material contract method upon approval by FAA. 2 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 IIII!!!IIIIIIII II�III puuu p ui�uiu a uu u�u uuui iuui uui a u�� uuuu uuou uul uuu ii uVuuuluu�u uuuiluuul ui�ui uillliuiu uuui ui uu ui�uiuu�uiiouul a uu ui�u ui uiil u • Altering materials or construction methods,post- bid,can result in a modification to AIP standards. Unless explicitly approved by the FAA, modification to AIP standards are not allowed. r « tt #rr� • Ad�t�#�6��tExtst�r�� III �tpTo1feCtop Ctuaf # �olitd,,,,, pry iiiiiiiiiii decay zf wo�K��iiiiii, bd trp� d tc� 1 # reasakeesepc ,,,,, Non a a#t neeessary t #Stts dd ht O d a � p r u e criptej q�f,a ,,, corit�ac#u # are ptctty r ;�d�d(� � pees::% a I'oveCt o ,,.,:. '„ p I?C �iiiiiiii =mOn ed eerp provsopat „ ap r,rat F • P �ttdspcspsof p ur s1h u'U d Jg'n try d pr #suc �� t p fottoptfi #ga pe i% lys Ineitgtb# # afapda� „ fl'ofp cost��i3 �,,,,,��rii rya eopdrtrops Cdr'dc� uep approve d srsd ,,,, readtr covf d ofiiiiiii�/////////�� diiiii TBE urtde Ris/ (T } e##fq Jt� d "trtstt arfc :,,,,x d spcspsoftc ao rep akrte COTit� Ct butdefed ffou� v ra#esbdfgf pd Foy a star�gx� elftCtt tY1a f r® r ., • Allowability • The sponsor • Same as quantity • Corrective depends on the should adjustment and Change Orders circumstances of demonstrate why new work item can result in the Change Order corrective action secondary project and only those or measure is cost increases costs directly necessary. such as additional necessary to . If the sponsor design and accomplish the proposes an inspection fees. project may be alternative • Such secondary approved. solution,the costs may or may • AIP cannot alternative must not be AIP participate in demonstrate an eligible. costs associated equivalent with re-work. product to what is • Participation in in the accepted additional work plans and due to errors and specifications. omission requires an evaluation of costs to determine what reasonably would have been incurred under 2 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 a III � � �� IIIIIII IIIII IIIII IIII IIIIII IIIIII IIII IIIIIII IIII IIII IIIIII IIII I� ��IIIIII the project if the error or omission had not occurred. IIUII IIIII IIIIIII IIIIII(IIIIIII ��""""" � � """ IN" * pull i m caa5 scldptai f�ctr f+ff Itom c I rh Vr rl affect try a !9� rtr ,,,,,,, reartiabt€ tft prtCf flpEI lletrty cif;;; 16, taksl� „ *S t i prof t., ,,,,,,,; mr r� «fork curr�,ti�ceri riiiiiiiii mafc�� puce � �, � �dpYbn: fhb pr�jf�,ct��c� � Omrt��p�l�lal ap trsttiy kith of ... u® �IIIIpI®uulpuuuuu�iiiliii�Ilpltuu III Allowability will Justification will Not applicable A no cost Change depend on the depend on the Order could circumstances of circumstances of increase or the Change the Change decrease Order. Order. secondary project costs such as design or inspection fees for period of IIII IIII I performance. IIIIII IIIIIII IIIIII a III � � �� IIIIIII IIIII IIIIIII IIII IIIIII IIIIII IIII IIIIIII IIII IIII IIIIII IIIIIIIII IIIIIIIII I� ��IIIIII 2.2. Standard Change Order Process The standard process for reviewing a Change Order assumes sufficient time is available for the sponsor to properly define the scope of the Change Order work item and to negotiate a firm fixed price that is fair and equitable. The process for administering an emergency Change Order differs slightly from the standard Change Order process. Refer to Section 2.3 to learn more about emergency Change Orders. Figure 2-1. Standard Change Order Process MW � r � r olliollioll 3 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 2.2.1. Step 1: Receive Change Order from Sponsor Unless specifically requested by the FAA specialist, the sponsor does not have to obtain prior FAA approval for contract changes. However, if a sponsor proceeds with a contract change without prior FAA approval, it is at the sponsor's risk. The FAA specialist's review at a later date determines which portion of Change Order costs are eligible for AIP participation. Sponsors that submit proposed Change Orders to the FAA for review prior to execution can avoid incurring costs for work items the FAA determines are ineligible. Sponsors may not request reimbursement under the AIP for any Change Order work item unless the FAA has approved AIP participation in the Change Order work item. 2.2.2. Step 2: Screen Change Order for Adequacy of Information This step represents an efficiency measure to limit the time spent reviewing a Change Order that has inadequate documentation or that is clearly not eligible. 1. Verify if the Change Order addresses work associated with the approved scope of work. If the extra work does not fall within the approved scope of work, the FAA specialist may end the review with a non-approval determination. 2. Verify if the provided documentation is sufficient to allow the FAA specialist to evaluate the Change Order for AIP eligibility. Refer to Appendix B for Change Order documentation. Contact the sponsor if documentation is insufficient. 2.2.3. Step 3: Evaluate Change Order for Eligibility 2.2.3.1. Evaluate Change Order for Allowability To verify the sponsor's due diligence, the FAA specialist reviews the Change Order to determine if the extra work is allowable or if deleting a contract work item causes project elements to become non-allowable. To be allowable, the work item costs must be necessary to accomplish the original scope of work, as per the grant agreement and accepted plans and specifications. The evaluation of allowability involves the following checks: 1. Verify the extra work does not involve non-allowable work as established within FAA Order 5100.38, AIP Handbook. 2. Verify the extra work conforms to applicable FAA Standards for design and construction (e.g., AC 150/5370-10 and AC 150/5300-13,Airport Design). 3. Verify the Change Order does not adversely affect compliance with applicable AIP procurement requirements such as Buy American Preferences and Disadvantage Business Enterprise participation: a. Buy American Preference. For new contract work items, evaluate the item for conformance with AIP preference for 100-percent U.S.-made product. If the item is less than 100-percent U.S. domestic product or if it is not already included on the FAA-approved list of Buy American waivers, the sponsor must obtain appropriate 2 This does not apply to necessary contract quantity adjustments,which are permitted under Section 90 of Advisory Circular 150/5370-10. 4 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 information from the contractor to support a permissible waiver. If the Change Order is deleting a work item, the FAA specialist must assess the effect the deletion may have on any previously approved Buy American waiver. Note: Under an FAA AIP Buy American Type III waiver, it is possible the new U.S. domestic product content may drop below the previously approved percentage or even below the 60-percent permissible threshold. b. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE). Assess the effect the Change Order may have on the previously accepted DBE participation percentage for the project. A Change Order that removes work items proposed for a DBE firm will likely result in an overall lower DBE participation percentage from that approved at the time of contract award. The sponsor may need to encourage the contractor to identify other opportunities for DBE participation that fulfill the original obligation. c. Davis-Bacon. Assess whether or not the current wage rate schedule incorporated into the contract addresses the labor classifications necessary for the Change Order work. The current wage rate schedule may need to be incorporated into the Change Order. 2.2.3.2. Evaluate Change Order for Justification The FAA specialist evaluates the Change Order work items to determine if the extra work or deleted work items are justified. FAA Order 5 100.3 8 addresses three basic tests to establish justification: 1. Work Advances AIP Policy. The added work items must be consistent with AIP goals that address agency objectives such as safety, security, environment, capacity, and preserving airport infrastructure. 2. Actual Need. The sponsor must demonstrate to FAA satisfaction why it is necessary to add or delete the work item(s) addressed in the Change Order in order to complete the project as intended under the original approved scope of work. The FAA specialist evaluates the Change Order to determine: a. If the sponsor has established need for the Change Order. b. If the Change Order addresses re-work due to errors or omissions. c. If a request to increase contract time is supported by documentation that demonstrates delays were due to circumstances outside of the contractor's control. 3. Change Order Scope Is Appropriate. The extra work must be necessary to carry out the project so a useable unit results at the conclusion of the project. The FAA specialist evaluates the Change Order to determine: a. If the additional work item exceeds FAA standards, resulting in unnecessary costs. b. If the additional work items meet applicable AIP standards for design and construction. c. If deleting work items alters the original approved scope of work. 2.2.3.3. Check for Reasonableness of Costs The FAA specialist makes the final determination of cost reasonableness as outlined in Chapter 3, Section 14, of FAA Order 5100.38, AIP Handbook. The FAA specialist makes this 5 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 determination by issuing correspondence that conveys approval,partial approval, or disapproval. In making this determination, the FAA specialists relies on a statement signed by the sponsor that it has performed either a price or cost analysis and that it recommends the FAA accept the price as fair and reasonable. The FAA specialist may ask the sponsor to submit additional documentation (e.g., documentation that supports the price/cost analysis, bid abstracts from recent projects, etc.)to support a determination of a fair and reasonable price. 2.2.4. Step 4: Initiate Correspondence for Action Taken 2.2.4.1. The FAA specialist prepares and submits correspondence that conveys to the sponsor a determination of AIP eligibility. There are three potential Change Order actions and correspondence: 1. Approved 2. Partially Approved 3. Disapproved 2.2.4.2. Because the sponsor has the option to submit changes as they occur or at the end of the project, the FAA specialist can address each Change Order individually or collectively at the end of the project, but also should not purposely refrain from making a determination of eligibility until the end of the project. 2.2.4.3. The FAA specialist can use any of the following forms of correspondence: • Hard copy letter • Emailed copy of the action letter(approval,partial approval, disapproval) • Email 2.2.4.4. In all cases, the correspondence must address the following minimum elements in Table 2-2 for the type of action being taken. Table 2-2. Change Order Correspondence uull u�ltll mEl IIII ;,IIIII IIIII ui�uui�uui m ponso, err opt Ala At Na ,4rr fJa Po —10, an ,..............Pro t�� Mori �,,,,,,�ro d ;�t;�ori t�rrs • Rro d�. ,fie orr trors� • oxract6rt r(rf * C�Srsfract 1,l detrffirf * Corsfract 1der� (rf p ttca....... ap stfe kst j,,,, IIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIII�IIIIIIIIIII II + �I Y �dV lue V', e.g., Change Order e.g., Change Order e.g., Change Order No. 5 No.5 No. 5 aee ® ,,,,,� ppel�5 on �Pat,4pprsv iiii � �tpr43/€"#t�aC1f III ° .; spoh �"s ubm�tted tssapn �3ortisef's # �K' �, �d000 �t crtf tton" ; tag rb piul a �I a�I ®lull ��I��Ilug�l Illlpuulj uuuuuuullllllllll��ll�llplllll . �,,,,;,n W Approved Change Approved Change Restrictions on IIIIIVu m uuum mluum u t 6 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 lEm ll II 11111u1� ;IIIIIII Order items Order items including non- participating work: - The incorporation of non-participating work items must not directly or indirectly result in additional costs to the AIP- eligible portion of the project. - Maintain separate and accurate cost accounting of the non-participating costs that will permit a third-party auditor to quickly verify proper cost allocation. plllll II , llllllllllillliul �uulll®IIIIIIIIIIIIIIuI�IIIIIIIIII IIII III IIIII'. � Ahl of appr�oye� +� ��st �of n�5�� • Nrat�p( � f �t,,,,,, Chagt;„�rdar cots part�e�pattn� ;�� pa�tic�patlrf�' :rrss - TCexptarkff ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, apr�3Y ( eft s m p® • Amount of approved • Amount of approved • Not applicable contra extension contract time disapproved and tim extee extension uupul a Vuuuuuuuul gpuuuuliuuiuuuuuiuuuuiuuuuuuuuuuiugllpl ;;,:,, ®t ® U y® >III iiiireT�15 d t rm�r�aticsr� • 1 hls( t jlYliha ,p l VVV V V VVV VV V VV VV VVV V��V�U� V ulk��IuVVI V��IVV VVV VVVV vii�® sote r fir t p p We r for t o pose,,,,, et asta} yn5stan eigbry essts agbrlt rscr�sts undexah�a progfarli.T1c#erf,,,,,, progfarf� T1[s actkrri,,,,, dcdt rere rttc� s met reret committr�entc�rr�rf��1�� fu�de ��ti�5rs ft�n�e ork ;,r �l , grarrt bbttgat frs ,�,�, obli a/JJo,// i • '`Cur preuaj with the , "Cur 'prevJ nth } tncrease rn Cbr�ra ct Increasers Co raprtAf rrpr er�t ifi addtt4rrat ctac agTf ( srttra �t me err 51t t fir ccrh t c tease �"1��i�rtccs�p6ra#l�rr��„ rrrr55r�pa�tsat�g, orK"';, Ir eu t no/ I o ec nd€ !Itr e ...e.nC.. t. r ........ ......... 7 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 lEm ��1��p1� ;IIII A1P �lbt�;„pcsrttc}�i�I d prof � � s�ts�fat�„arid��t�rat�; ; c�s�t�cetsur�i�r�g��, d that Will p rri t # rd p�rkY a ��t�t�ufckty ;, of prsp ;dc�st,,, iu91!!!IIIIIII IIIIIII IIIII�IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII qll Ip, u puiiugpulul I® . Forward one copy "Forward one copy Not applicable (preferably emailed (preferably emailed pdf)of the executed pdf)of the executed Change Order to my Change Order to my attention as soon as it attention as soon as it is available." is available." • Indicate details of this • "Indicate details of this Change Order on your Change Order on your as-built drawings." as-built drawings." ll�l,illll ul�p,IIIIIIIIUIIIuI ullllluill ulullllillllll IIIIlluulllull ilu Illiul •„`Ntppttcafteapptrcabt� Nitpptr�abt 2.2.5. Step 5: Archive Correspondence in Grant File The FAA specialist should archive the correspondence in the grant document file. 2.3. Emergency Change Order Process An emergency Change Order addresses extra work that the sponsor and the FAA mutually agree is time critical for mitigating an immediate safety or airport operational concern or addressing differing site conditions that have the potential to adversely impact the project's progress. Emergency Change Orders can result in premium prices for Change Order work. The application of the emergency Change Order process should be limited to situations where it is absolutely necessary. Insufficient planning and convenience are not adequate reasons to use the emergency Change Order process. Administration of emergency Change Order work differs from the standard process in that it is typically in the best interest of the FAA to immediately commence extra work rather than wait until the standard process is finished. Initial coordination of emergency Change Orders is typically via telephone or email. The complete description of the work may not be readily available to allow a contractor to determine the necessary level of effort and risk that may apply. A valid emergency Change Order is a situation where the time and material (T&M)payment approach is justified under the AIR The steps for administering an emergency change will vary according to the extent and context of the emergency. Generally, the Change Order process for valid emergencies begins with required immediate actions but concludes with steps from the standard process flow. 8 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Figure 2-2. Emergency Change Order Process Y Y'JYYYYYI,,,JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY Y , Y , YY , Y > > Y ,Y , Y ,YY Y IYY yYll JlyYlIYY yYI,/IyYyy//yYl!/liJYyyllJJyyIIPYyyI,yY/I/I pI! Yyyl,yyyyy YYYYYYY Y°�� /��/�� /��J �� lll,�///�/��ll 111111 JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 2.3.1. Step 1: Initial Coordination 2.3.1.1. Initial coordination will generally be either verbal communication (i.e., telephone conversation) or by email. If initial coordination is verbal, the FAA specialist should request the caller to follow up the phone conversation with an email that documents the main discussion points. 2.3.1.2. When initially discussing an emergency Change Order, the FAA specialist should address the following issues: 1. What happened? 2. What are the immediate consequences? a. Are airport operations adversely affected? b. Are there immediate construction safety issues? 3. Is the Change Order allowable and justified? Note: Characterizing the situation as an "emergency" does not make the work automatically eligible. a. Example 1: Immediate replacement or stabilizing of an isolated pocket of unsuitable subgrade may be eligible. b. Example 2: Mitigating subgrade due to discovery of hazardous contamination may not be eligible. 4. What conversations has the sponsor had with the Contractor about corrective action? 5. How will Change Order costs be established? a. For some emergency work items, cost data from current project(i.e., bid prices) and recent AIP projects may be sufficient to establish reasonableness of costs under a price analysis approach; b. For most emergency work items, it may be impractical to determine the extent of work or the level of required effort. In such cases, a time and material contract is 9 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 appropriate provided the sponsor is made aware of the constraints associated with a T&M approach. 2.3.2. Step 2: Follow-On Coordination While the coordination may be verbal at first, the FAA specialist should emphasize use of email to document discussions with the sponsor and the consultant. File copies of such email discussions in the grant project file. 2.3.3. Step 3: Initial Approval Action Once the sponsor provides sufficient information to provide direction to the contractor, the FAA specialist may grant initial approval of the emergency Change Order. The type of initial approval will depend on the specific circumstances of the emergency. 1. Conditional Approval. Send an email offering approval with additional work conditioned on the following: a. The sponsor can base the extra work item cost on existing contract unit prices. b. The FAA will establish a not-to-exceed value with the sponsor. c. The FAA will require the sponsor to submit a formal Change Order with final costs. 2. Provisional Approval. Send an email offering provisional approval: a. When the extent and effort required of work items are not initially known; b. Advising the sponsor that given the unknown circumstances of the emergency action, anticipated costs will be determined eligible,provided they are allowable under AIP and justified for the project. 3. Permit Use of Time and Material(T&M) Payment Approach. If using this type of approval: a. Require the sponsor to negotiate a value for profit to be used in the T&M; this may be a firmed fixed value or may be incorporated into a burdened hourly rate for the laborers. b. Require the sponsor to establish a ceiling price that cannot be exceeded unless at the contractor's risk. c. Require the sponsor to provide active oversight of the contractor's performance to establish the level of effort and efficiency. The sponsor must maintain detailed notes documenting the contractor's performance. 2.3.4. Step 4: Revert to Standard Change Order Process 2.3.4.1. Once the emergency work is fully defined and the level of effort necessary to carry out the remaining emergency work is known, the sponsor should consider reverting to a firm fixed price Change Order if it is practical to do so. If not, the agreements that are informally in place may continue. However, the sponsor should proceed with establishing a standard Change Order to cover this work. 2.3.4.2. Once the sponsor submits the standard Change Order, the FAA specialist should review the Change Order similar to a standard process but starting at Standard Step 3 (paragraph 10 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 2.2.3). Since the FAA specialist should already be well informed of the Change Order details, the review of Standard Steps 3-5 (paragraphs 2.2.3-2.2.5)will likely be cursory. The intent of this second review is to verify that the agreed-upon elements of the initial approval are still valid with the formal Change Order. 2.3.4.3. The FAA specialist completes the emergency Change Order process by initiating an approval/partial approval/disapproval letter per Standard Step 4 (paragraph 2.2.4) and archiving the letter action and supporting documentation per Standard Step 5 (paragraph 2.2.5). 11 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 This page intentionally left blank. 12 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 APPENDIX A. GLOSSARY 1. Accepted Plans and Specifications: approval based on airport sponsor self-certification as defined in FAA Order 5100.38. 2. Approved Scope of Work: synonymous with"Project" as defined in Section 10 of AC 150/5370-10. 3. Bid Item: synonymous with"Contract Item" as defined in Section 10 of AC 150/5370- 10. 4. Burdened Rate: the allocation rate at which indirect costs are applied to the direct costs of either labor or inventory. 5. Change Order: See Section 10 of AC 150/5370-10 for a definition of"Change Order" as it applies to this SOP. 6. Contract Item (Pay Item): See Section 10 of AC 150/5370-10 for a definition as it applies to this SOP. 7. Corrective Change Order: a Change Order issued to either correct work already completed or to prevent a design deficiency from occurring. Corrective Change Orders are typically a result of an error, omission, or design change. Corrective Change Orders that are preventative may be eligible. Corrective Change Orders that cause re-work may not be fully eligible. 8. Deductive Change Order: a Change Order issued to reduce the contract work by deleting a contract work item (i.e., omitted work) or removing a contract requirement. 9. Emergency Change Order: a Change Order that requires urgent action to avoid a significant delay to the project critical path or to mitigate an immediate airport safety or operational deficiency. 10. Extra Work: See Section 10 of AC 150/5370-10 for a definition of"Extra Work" as it applies to this SOP. 11. Omitted Item: work/contract/bid items that are being deleted from the original approved project scope. See Section 40 of AC 150/5370-10. Synonymous with a deleted work item. 12. Project: See Section 10 of AC 150/5370-10 for a definition as it applies to this SOP. 13. Supplemental Agreement: See Section 10 of AC 150/5370-10 for a definition of "Supplemental Agreement" as it applies to this SOP. 14. Time and Material: contract methods that allows acquiring material and services on the basis of negotiated burdened labor hours (i.e., wages, overhead, general administrative expenses, and profit) and materials at cost. The time and material method is appropriate only if other contract methods are not suitable, and if at the time of the procurement action, it is not possible to estimate accurately the extent or duration of the work or to estimate costs with any reasonable degree of confidence. 15. Usable Unit of Work: See Table Al of FAA Order 5100.38 for a definition of usable unit of work as it applies to this SOP. A-1 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 This page intentionally left blank. A-2 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 APPENDIX B. CHANGE ORDER CONTENTS The sponsor Change Order may address individual work items or they may include multiple work items. When applicable, Change Orders under an AIP-funded construction project should contain the following basic components and supporting documentation. Note: FAA Order 5100.38 allows the FAA specialist to request additional documentation as necessary to determine AIP eligibility. 1. General Change Order Information 2. Airport Name 3. AIP Grant Number 4. Project Description (i.e., Reconstruct Runway 02/20) 5. Contract Identifier: if the AIP grant includes more than one prime contract(i.e., Contract Number, Contractor Name, or Work Scope Number) 6. Change Order Sequence Number 7. Description of Construction Change Order 8. Justification for the Construction Change Order. The Change Order a. Should clearly explain and document the circumstances that necessitated a Change Order. Examples include unforeseen site conditions, work necessary to have a usable unit at the close out of the grant, and omissions in the plans and specifications that could not have been foreseen during the project design phase. b. Must provide sufficient information to allow the FAA specialist to determine if the Change Order work is the result of an error or omission on the part of the airport consultant. c. Must document that the change is needed and directly related to the work identified in the grant description rather than an afterthought, do-over, "nice to have item," or maintenance after construction. d. Must provide enough information to allow the FAA specialist to determine that the changes are consistent with FAA standards or provide the disposition of any modifications to standards. e. Must address the reason for any proposed contract time extensions or modifications (i.e., document the abnormal conditions or circumstances and how it affected the original project schedule). This should include a discussion of liquidated damages. 9. Cost Reasonableness a. The sponsor must perform either a price or cost analysis with every Change Order. b. The sponsor must prepare an Independent Cost Estimate (ICE)prior to receipt of the contractor's proposal. Evidence of this must be by signature of preparer and date the estimate was prepared. c. The sponsor must provide the FAA a written statement that addresses the type of analysis they used to establish a fair and equitable price for the extra work. B-1 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 d. The statement should typically include a recommendation to accept their analysis as evidence of cost reasonableness. e. The FAA specialist has the final determination on whether the costs are reasonable. 10. Consequences of Change Order Attachment a. The sponsor's attachment should address the consequences of the Change Order, contract time, and related services. b. The sponsor's attachment must address itemized cost breakdown of the associated costs and include the original contract value (FAA federal share) and cumulative value of contract to-date (with all Change Orders). c. The attachment must justify, in accordance with AC 150/5370-10, the original schedule and any proposed changes to schedule (Change in Contract Time). d. The attachment should indicate any effect on other costs such as engineering, construction management, or inspection. 11. Conformance to AIP Standards and Regulations a. The Change Order documentation should include a statement addressing conformance to AIP standards and regulations. The following are some of the more common FAA Standards and Regulations that might be affected: i. FAA design and construction standards ii. Procurement standards and requirements iii. Buy American provisions iv. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise 12. Supporting Documentation 13. Sketches/Diagrams/Drawings 14. Revised CSPP 15. Other Information as Requested by FAA Specialist B-2 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 APPENDIX C. SAMPLES OF CHANGE ORDER CORRESPONDENCE C.I. Sample: Change Order Approval Correspondence 46) U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration [Date] [Mr./Ms.] XXX Airport Manager 555 Airport Parkway Anywhere USA, US 99999 Airport: Anywhere Airport AIP Grant No. X-XX-XXXX-XXX-XXXX [Project Name] Contract No. (if applicable) Change Order No. X I have reviewed the subject Change Order and associated costs and determined that [a portion of] the additional contract items are eligible for AIP participation. The following contract items are approved in the total amount of$00 and [no I a# day] increase in contract time: 1. 2. AIP will not participate in the following contract items. Refer to the attachment for an explanation[*]: 1. 2. The following limitations apply to this action: • This determination is solely for the purpose of establishing eligibility of costs under the AIP program. This approval does not represent a commitment of Federal funds in addition to the original grant obligation. • The incorporation of non-participating work items must not directly or indirectly result in any additional cost to the AIP-eligible portion of the project. Please maintain a separate and accurate cost accounting of the non-participating work that will permit a third party auditor to quickly verify proper allocation of costs. • [**]Our approval with the increase in contract time does not represent FAA concurrence with additional time for construction phase services. C-1 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 Please forward a copy of the executed change to my attention as soon as it is available. Your record drawings should indicate details addressed by this Change Order. If you have questions,please call me at(555) 555-5555. Sincerely, [FAA Specialist's Name] Notes to the FAA Specialist: *Provide explanation of ineligible or non-participating work in separate attachment. **This item only applies to time extension requests. ADO may elect to use their approval block with appropriate disclaimers if all items in the Change Order are approved. C-2 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 C.2. Sample: Change Order Disapproval Correspondence COW U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration [Date] Mr. [Ms.] XXX Airport Manager 555 Airport Parkway Anywhere USA, US 99999 Airport: Anywhere Airport AIP Grant No. X-XX-XXXX-XXX-XXXX [Project Name] Contract Identified (If applicable) Change Order No. X I have reviewed the subject Change Order and associated documentation and find the work to be ineligible under the subject grant agreement for the following reasons: • Extra work unnecessary to accomplish the project scope as originally approved. • Extra work is the result of errors or omissions that could foreseeably been avoided. • Extra work not allowable under the AIP. • Cost of extra work is not reasonable. Change Order No. X is disapproved. Note the following if you proceed with this work: • The incorporation of non-participating work items must not directly or indirectly result in additional costs to the AIP-eligible portion of the project. • Maintain separate and accurate cost accounting of the non-participating costs that will permit a third parry auditor to quickly verify proper cost allocation. If you have questions,please call me at(555) 555-5555. Sincerely, [FAA Specialist's Name] C-3 ARP SOP No. 7.00 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 This page intentionally left blank. C-4 Effective Date: October 1, 2015 ARP SOP No. 7.00 APPENDIX D. LIST OF STEPS D.I. Standard Change Order Process 1. Step 1 —Receive Change Order from Sponsor 2. Step 2— Screen Change Order for Adequacy of Information 3. Step 3 —Evaluate Change Order for Eligibility a. Allowability b. Justification c. Reasonableness of costs 4. Step 4 —Initiate Correspondence for Action Taken (Approval/Partial Approval/Disapproval) 5. Step 5 —Archive Correspondence in Grant File D.2. Emergency Change Order Process 1. Step 1 —Initial Coordination 2. Step 2—Follow-on Coordination 3. Step 3 —Initial Approval Action 4. Step 4 —Revert to Standard Change Order Process D-1 SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 01250 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Section 01310 "Project Management and Coordination" coordination and submittal of payment application with construction meetings. 3. Section 01320 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 4. Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" for initial submittal of payment application and coordination with complementary submittals. 5. Volume 1 of 5 Bidding and Contract Requirements Division III General Provisions. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of Payment Application with the Schedule of Values, overall Bar Chart and Individual Residence Construction Schedules. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the sample Schedule of Values during the initial submittal to Program Manager; see Section 01330, Submittal Procedures, within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed and no later than seven (7) days before the date scheduled for the first Application for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the following categories as a guide to establish line items for each residence identified in the Schedule of Values. 1. Format the Schedule of Values so it matches the layout of the bid form and such that each residence is identified separately. 2. Line Item Categories: Provide at least one line item for each category for each Property. a. Bonds & Insurance b. Pre-Construction Work (Measurement Visit, Pre-Construction Meeting, Submittals and Product Procurement) C. General Conditions d. Windows e. Doors f. Wall Modifications g. Mechanical h. Electrical PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1 i. Hazmat Remediation 3. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Program Manager. C. Contractor's name and address. d. Date of submittal. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values to indicate the cost of materials separate from cost of labor and subcontracted work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities,warehousing and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values, such as General Requirements or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. At the end of the schedule of values, list any unit prices as indicated to be included in the total bid on the bid form. 10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Application for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Program Manager and paid for by Sponsor. 1. An initial sample Application for Payment will be submitted and approved prior to the first Application for Payment. B. Payment Application Times: The Sponsor shall indicate the date for each progress payment.The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G-702, "Application and Certification for Payment," and AIA Document G-703, "Continuation Sheets" and "Monroe County Affidavit and Partial Release of Lien" and "Monroe County Final Release of Lien". D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. The Program Manager will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 3. Do not include Construction Change Directives, Construction Field Directives, or Change Orders unless approved by the Sponsor and Program Manager. E. Transmittal: At least 48 hours prior to intended actual Application for Payment date, the Contractor shall submit one electronic copy of Application for Payment to Program Manager for PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 -2 review and comment. Following corrections from Program Manager review, submit one (1) signed and notarized original and one (1) copy of each Application for Payment to the Sponsor. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, following the Initial Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Program Manager reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: a. Submit each Application for Payment with "Monroe County Affidavit and Partial Release of Lien" for the construction period covered by the application. b. Submit Final Application for Payment with "Monroe County Final Release of Lien" from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. G. Progress Payments: Progress payments will be made in accordance with General Provision 90- 06 Partial Payments. H. Stored Materials Off the Site: Refer to Volume 1 of 5 Bidding and Contract Requirements Division III General Provisions Section 90 Measurement and Payment. I. Payroll Records (Certified Payroll): With each Application for Payment, submit Payroll Records for all workers including from subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,for construction period covered by the application. (See Volume 1 —Division III General Provisions Section 160-01 for additional requirements) J. DBE Certifications: With each Application for Payment, submit monthly DBE Payment Certification Form and DBE Expenditure Report Form. Provide Final Report Utilization of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBEs) Form with final payment. (See Volume 1 —Division III General Provisions Section 150 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program for additional requirements) K. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 12. Performance and Payment bonds. 13. Other documentation required by Volume 1 of 5 Bidding and Contract Requirements Division III General Provisions. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 3 L. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion of the overall contract: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion AIA Document G-704, "Certificate of Substantial Completion," submit an Application for Payment showing 90% percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect certificates of substantial completion by Property as indicated and signed by the Program Manager. M. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with lien releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G-701, "Change Order" 5. AIA Document G-702, "Application and Certification for Payment." 6. AIA Document G-703, "Continuation Sheet." 7. AIA Document G-704, "Certificate of Substantial Completion." 8. AIA Document G-706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 9. AIA Document G-706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 10. AIA Document G-707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 11. Monroe County Final Release of Lien Form. 12. Evidence that all claims have been settled. 13. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement (if applicable). PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 -4 MONROE COUNTY LIEN WAIVER FORMS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 5 MONROE COUNTY AFFIDAVIT AND PARTIAL RELEASE OF LIEN APPLICATION NO.: PERIOD ENDING DATE: APPLICATION DATE: KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that the undersigned, for and in consideration of the payment of the sum$ ,to be paid to the undersigned, hereby releases, acquits,satisfies and forever discharges, MONROE COUNTY,OWNER,theirsuccessors and assigns from all suits,causes of action, liens, lien rights, claims or demands of anykind whatsoever, to the extent of the payment to date on account of the furnishing of labor, material or services for the improvement of the following described property: As part of this PARTIAL RELEASE, THAT UNDERSIGNED HEREBY CERTIFIES the following: THAT the contract of the undersigned, as adjusted by all increases and decreases, is in the amount of $ as of the date of the Partial Release and the undersigned has received $ as payment on the adjusted contractamount as of the date of this Partial Release. THAT all supplies of labor, material or services furnished to, or for the benefit of the undersigned for improvement to thesubject property has been paid in full. Any and all suppliers of labor, material or services for improvement to the subject property, who have not been paid in full are listed below with the amount owing each, claimed by each and the reason fornon-payment: (If none, write "NONE") CLAIMANT AMOUNT DUE AMOUNT CLAIMED REASON FOR NONPAYMENT THAT all taxes imposed by all government agencies have been paid and discharged. THAT all funds have been collected for FICA and withholding taxes have been properly deposited with appropriate agencies or paid to the government as required by law. THAT the undersigned has no other claims for money against the OWNER other than those Subcontractors'/Suppliers' amounts remaining due and owing on the adjusted contract balance as reflected above. THAT the undersigned further certifies that if there is a Guarantee, Warranty or Maintenance Agreement in connection with the labor and material furnished by it, that this payment and PARTIAL RELEASE shall not release the undersigned from any obligations under such Guarantee, Warranty, or Maintenance Agreement. WITNESS MY HAND THIS day of 120 Witness Name of Company Witness Signature, Title STATE OF: COUNTY OF: Subscribed and sworn to (or affirmed) before me, by means of ❑ physical presence or ❑ online notarization, on (date) by (name of affiant). He/She is personally known to me or has produced (type of identification)as identification. NOTARY PUBLIC PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 6 PROJECT NAME: MONROE COUNTY FINAL RELEASE OF LIEN KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that for and consideration of the sum of Dollars ($ ) paid to by Monroe County, Florida receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, do(does) hereby release and quit claim to Monroe County, Florida, the Owner, its successors or assigns, all liens, lien rights, claims or demands of any kindwhatsoever which has (have) or might have against the property, building, and/or improvements, on account of labor performed,material furnished, and/or for any incidental expense for the construction of: thereon or in otherwise improving said property situated as above described. IN WITNESS WHEREOF THIS day of , 20 Witness Name of Company Witness Signature, Title STATE OF: COUNTY OF: Subscribed and sworn to (or affirmed) before me, by means of ❑ physical presence or ❑ online notarization, on (date) by (name of affiant). He/She is personally known to me or has produced (type of identification)as identification. NOTARY PUBLIC PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 7 END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 8 SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 4. Project meetings. 5. Closeout activities. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section 01100 "Summary" for procedures and miscellaneous provisions. 2. Division 1 Section 01320 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting action and information submittals. 4. Division 1 Section 01600 "Product Requirements" for administrative and procedural requirements for product selection and handling, warranties, and product substitutions. 5. Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout. 6. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. Coordination: The Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall coordinate its operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. C. If necessary, prepare memoranda to document and distribute to each party involved, outlining procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01310 - 1 AND COORDINATION 1. Prepare similar memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining the special procedures required for coordination where required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Contract Start up activities. 3. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 4. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 5. Delivery and processing of submittals. 6. Progress meetings. 7. Project closeout activities. E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in the Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Shop Drawings that indicate different trades and overlapping work as required for installation of products and materials fabricated and installed by separate entities. 1. Indicate relationships of components shown on separate Shop Drawings (pay particular attention to coordination of the General Work with the Mechanical Work). 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical General Requirements" and Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. B. Staff Names: Within ten (10) days after the Notice to Proceed submit a list of principal staff assignments, including Project Manager and Superintendent and other personnel anticipated at the Project site. Identify individuals,their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. An Emergency telephone number and cell phone number shall also be included for twenty-four(24) hour contact with the Contractor. 1. Following review by the Program Manager, provide copies in electronic PDF format to the Sponsor and Program Manager and post a hardcopy of the list in Project field office. 1.04 REQUIRED DOCUMENTS A. Contractors and Subcontractors shall maintain required paperwork through each stage of construction. Any Contractor or subcontractor(s), who fails to submit required documents in a timely, orderly and correct manner, shall be required to attend remedial training, may be placed on probationary status and/or be removed from the eligible list of bidders. PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01310 -2 AND COORDINATION 1.05 SCHEDULES A. The Contractor shall prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar chart type overall Construction Schedule within ten (10)days after the Notice to Proceed-Permits. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. The Overall Construction Schedule shall show: 1. Required submittals for each section of specification and for each property. 2. Submission data for all required submittals including shop drawings and samples. 3. Product ordering dates. 4. Product delivery dates. 5. Construction start dates. 6. Dates of Substantial Completion, Punch List completion, Final Completion and Closeout of each property. 7. The required date for Final Completion for all work. B. Construction Schedule: It is not the intent of this Section to provide a detailed construction schedule for the Contractor's operations, but rather to provide limitations and restrictions within which the Contractor shall schedule work. All schedule revisions must be approved by the Program Manager. Deficiency points will be assessed pursuant to Special Provisions SP13 for failure to complete the Work as scheduled. C. Schedule shall take into account, represent and highlight processing dates and times of all long lead time items. D. Coordinate the Overall Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, List of Subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, Payment Requests and other schedules. E. Schedule work to allow for products with long lead times. Schedule preparation of submittals for those products prior to other submittals. F. Distribution: Following review by the Program Manager, print and distribute construction schedule with copies to the Program Manager, Superintendent, Subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. G. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Contractor will be responsible for projecting a revised completion date for all proposal requests and potential scheduling alterations issued by Program Manager. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. 1.06 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL A. General: The Contractor shall provide and bear all costs in conjunction the following minimum project management personnel: 1. Project Manager— Project Lead 2. Project Superintendent—Construction Activities and Quality Control 3. Project Superintendent— Logistics and Planning 4. Other administrative personnel as required for proper performance of the work The Contractor shall provide written resumes for the designated Project Manager, Project Superintendent - Construction Activities and Quality Control and Project Superintendent — Logistics & Planning as part of the Bid, for review and approval by the Program Manager. Once approved, project management personnel for the project shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Program Manager. All three (3) project management personnel must each be a full-time W2 employees of the Contractor, who are regularly employed by the Contractor. PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01310 - 3 AND COORDINATION Leased employees and 1099 employees are not acceptable. All three (3) project management personnel shall be in physical attendance and fully accessible at the Project site throughout the duration of the project during all work hours and accessible for emergency situations that may arise outside of normal work hours. The Contractor will provide the Program Manager with the day, evening and cell phone numbers for each of its three (3) project management personnel. B. Project Manager: The Contractor shall provide and bear all costs in conjunction with a dedicated Project Manager for the project. The Project Manager shall have proven and verifiable high-rise multi-story building construction management experience. The Project Manager shall be responsible for all paperwork including but not limited to: Schedules, RFI's, Project Status Updates, Product and Progress Submittals,Change Orders, Payment Requests, etc. The Project manager shall be dedicated to the Project and shall be accessible at all times during the Project durations and available to attend all job meetings. Note that the Contractor's Project Superintendent(s) and Project Manager cannot be the same person. C. Project Superintendent(s): The Contractor shall provide and bear all costs in conjunction with two (2)full-time on-site Project Superintendents and any necessary assistants on site during the project duration, all satisfactory to the Program Manager. Both Project Superintendents shall have proven and verifiable high-rise multi-story building construction experience. Both Project Superintendents shall be responsible for coordinating all the work of the Contractor and must refrain from performing any construction labor tasks. Both Project Superintendents shall be on- site during all construction and shall be the interface between the Program Manager and the workers. Both Project Superintendents shall direct the Contractors work crews and will be responsible for quality control. Both Project Superintendents shall attend all scheduled meetings with the Program Manager and be prepared to provide necessary input and feedback on job progress. D. The Contractor shall provide project management and supervision for the Work, using its best skill and attention. It shall carefully study and compare all Contract Documents and other instructions and shall at once report to the Program Manager any error, inconsistency or omission which it may discover, but it shall not be held responsible for their existence or discovery 1.07 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: The Program Manager will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site office unless otherwise indicated. The Project site office is located at the construction trailer at Key West by the Sea. B. The Contractor or his/her representative shall attend all scheduled Contractor meetings as listed: 1. Pre-construction Conference. 2. Pre-construction Meetings. 3. Progress Meetings. 4. Process Meetings. 5. Substantial Inspection. 6. Final Inspection. C. Attendees: The Program Manager will inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Project Meetings shall include the Program Manager, Contractor's Project Manager and Superintendents. 1. Agenda: All Parties shall prepare a meeting agenda for distribution prior to the job meetings to all invited attendees. 2. Minutes: The Program Manager shall prepare meeting minutes and record significant discussions and agreements achieved as a contract record. The meeting minutes will be distributed prior to the job meetings to all concerned parties, including the Program Manager, Contractor within seven (7)working days of the meeting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01310 -4 AND COORDINATION D. Initial Pre-construction Conference: The Program Manager will schedule a pre-construction conference, at a time convenient to the Program Manager and Sponsor, but no later than ten (10) days after the issuance of Notice to Proceed-Permits. The conference will be held at the Project Site. The Program Manager shall conduct the meeting to review project organization, communication, responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: The Program Manager and his/her representatives /design consultants; The Sponsor, the Contractor (Project Manager, Superintendent); major subcontractors; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress and the most efficient execution for the success of the Project, including but not limited to: a. Tentative overall construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing. C. Communication procedures. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field issues and changes. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Submittal procedures. h. Distribution of the Submittals and Shop Drawings. i. Maintenance of the Contract Record Documents. j. Use of the premises. k. Parking availability. I. Equipment deliveries and priorities. M. Badging & Security. n. Progress cleaning. o. Working hours. P. Lien Waivers. q. Construction period. r. Inspections. S. Close-out. 3. A portion of this meeting will be used by the Program Manager to demonstrate and explain the goals of the Key West International Airport Noise Insulation Program. 4. Following this conference, the Program Manager and Contractor shall visit each unit for the purpose of taking measurements and documenting existing conditions. See 01100 Summary 1.08D. Pre-Construction Measurement Visit. E. Second Pre-construction Conference: The Program Manager will schedule a pre-construction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Program Manager, but no later than ten (10)days after Notice to Proceed-Construction. F. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Program Manager to schedule and conduct a "Forty- Eight Hour Pre-Construction Walk-Through"Meeting 48 hours in advance of the construction start date for each individual Property to confirm that the Property Owner is prepared, and the pre- work responsibilities have been completed. The Contractor shall confirm with the Program PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01310 - 5 AND COORDINATION Manager no less than five (5) work days prior to the commencement of work at each unit that he/she is intending to begin work on the scheduled date. The Contractor and Program Manager shall review with the Property Owner the following: 1. Construction sequencing (windows, doors, mechanical, etc). 2. Scheduled Contractor access to the premises. 3. Substantial Completion, Punch-list, Final Completion and Warranty. 4. Property Owner access, involvement and site responsibilities. 5. The Contractor shall prepare a memorandum subject to the Sponsor's, Program Manager's and Property Owner's review and comment which outlines the above-mentioned items. G. Weekly Construction Progress Meetings: Conduct construction progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with reporting requirements and preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to the Program Manager, Project Superintendents, Contractor, subcontractors; other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Sequence of operations. 2) Status of submittals. 3) Deliveries. 4) Access. 5) Site utilization. 6) Progress cleaning. 7) Quality and work standards. 8) Request for Information. 9) Request for Change. 10) Proposal Requests. 11) Construction Field Directives. 12) Construction Change Directives. 13) Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests. 15) Warranties. 16) Record Photographs. PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01310 - 6 AND COORDINATION 17) As-Built Documents. 18) Closeout status. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. H. Process Meetings: During construction, periodic site meetings shall be held on an "as needed" basis with the Contractor, major Subcontractors and Program Manager. When construction is complete, the Contractor, Program Manager and Property Owner shall meet at the site to review work for Certification of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01310 - 7 AND COORDINATION SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Overall Contract Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Proposed Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location/ Inventory reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Construction photographs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01290 "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section 01310 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures"for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section 01400 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 5. Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital photographs as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 6. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started. B. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. C. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. PROGRESS 01320 - 1 DOCUMENTATION B. Submittals Schedule: Submit schedule in electronic PDF format. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for initial and subsequent submittals. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category(action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractors. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Program Manager's final release or approval. C. Overall Construction Schedule: Submit initial schedule in electronic PDF format, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period with all designated milestones. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated)and date on schedule. D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit in electronic PDF format prior to weekly job meetings. E. Material Inventory/ Location Reports: The Contractor shall provide a dated weekly report of all products that have been ordered with the scheduled delivery date and the actual delivery date. The Report shall indicate products by residence and supplier updated weekly and distributed to the Program Manager at the weekly job meetings. F. Request for Interpretation: The Contractor shall submit a written Request for Interpretation, if differing conditions appear in the field that alter the scope of the Work. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. C. See Section 01310 Project Management and Coordination — 1.07 Project Meetings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, arranged in chronological order by dates„„required priority„, and construction schedule. Include time required for review, re-submittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, suppliers, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Organize Submittals Schedule to correspond with product lead times, putting longest lead times first. 3. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain PROGRESS 01320 -2 DOCUMENTATION orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 4. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.02 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, OVERALL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion and Payment. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 30 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and re-submittal times indicated in Division 1 Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 3. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion and allow time for Program Manager's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Limitations of continued occupancies. b. Use of premises restrictions. C. Seasonal variations. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, interim milestones indicated below, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 1. Pre-construction Meeting. 2. Administrative submittals. 3. Construction measurement pre-walks. 4. Product submittals. 5. Shop Drawings. 6. Product Delivery. 7. Individual proposed start dates by address. 8. Individual substantial completion dates by address. 9. Individual punch list Inspections dates by address. 10. Individual punch list completion dates by address. 11. Individual final completion dates by address. 12. Individual close-out dates by address. 13. Contract substantial completion. 14. Contract completion. PROGRESS 01320 - 3 DOCUMENTATION F. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. G. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.03 CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in ten (10) percent increments within time bar. 2.04 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. Meetings and significant decisions. 4. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 5. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 6. Construction Change Directives received. 7. Field Change Directives received. 8. Substantial Completions verified. B. Material Location / Inventory Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing date materials were ordered, when products are anticipated, received, previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a written Request for Information (RFI) which includes a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. PROGRESS 01320 -4 DOCUMENTATION 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule in electronic PDF format to Program Manager, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Digital Photos: Electronic Digital Photographs or approved alternate. B. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph. C. Pre-construction Photographs: Before starting construction, take ten (10) digital photographs of Project site from different vantage points, or as directed by Program Manager. 1. Field Office Prints: Retain one copy of periodic photographs in field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to Program Manager. D. In-Process Photographs: Take digital photographs during door and window installation process at each opening in sufficient quantity as required to document the existing rough opening conditions and new construction elements which are being installed and are no longer visible after final trim or finish is installed. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take ten (10) digital photographs after date of Punch-list Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. The Photographs should reflect the new construction elements and be coordinated with the Program Manager. END OF SECTION 01320 PROGRESS 01320 - 5 DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 01290 "Payment Procedures"for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Section 01400 "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and Delegated-Design Submittals. 3. Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties, Project Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 3-16 Technical Specifications; see specific Sections for submittal requirements. 5. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Program Manager's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Program Manager's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Program Manager for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Commence the work of preparing submittals required by the Contract Documents immediately after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, submit product data and manufacturer's standard installation details for windows,doors and other major products. 1. Do not schedule or commence walk-through inspections until after product data has been submitted and approved by the Program Manager. C. Preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Program Manager reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 D. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01320 "Construction Progress Documentation"for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for informational, administrative and action submittals. Such submittals include but are not limited to: 1. Submittal schedule. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Permits. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Shop Drawings. 6. Product data/samples. 7. Payment Application. 8. Request for Information. 9. Request for Change. 10. Guarantees and Warranties. 11. Construction Schedule. 12. Record Drawings. 13. Record Photographs. E. Processing Time: Illustrate in the schedule and allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Initial submittal, review period, re-submittal final approval and submission of final bound sets. 1. Initial Review: Allow ten (10) working days for initial review of each submittal. Prioritize submittals in order of importance (Schedules, Schedule of Values, Unit Prices, Payment Application, Major Products with significant lead times, permits, etc.). Allow additional time if processing must be delayed due to bulk submittal of documents that are unresponsive to an approved schedule. The Program Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Allow ten (10)working days for processing each re-submittal. 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. F. Identification: Provide cover page on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm and the person that prepared each submittal. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 x 6 inches on cover page to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Program Manager. 3. Include the following information on cover page for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Program Manager. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name of manufacturer. f. Unique identifier, including revision number. g. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. h. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. i. Other necessary identification. G. Deviations: All deviations from the specifications shall be highlighted, encircled, or otherwise identified in submittals and brought to the Program Manager's attention. The Contractor is fully responsible for meeting the performance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents. If Substitutions, alternates or deviations are to be considered it is the responsibility of the Contractor to bring it to the attention of the Program Manager for review. H. Additional Copies: The Contractor shall initially submit one (1) hardcopy of each submittal and one electronic PDF copy. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -2 I. Transmittal: Package each initial submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Program Manager will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Program Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Category and type of submittal. f. Submittal purpose and description. g. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. h. Remarks. i. Signature of transmitter. J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final reviewed sets of the submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Program Manager in connection with construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated: a. Initial Submittal: Submit One (1) hard copies of each submittal and an electronic PDF copy. Required corrections will be noted on the PDF copy and the PDF will be stamped and returned to the Contractor for re-submittal, or if requiring no revisions when initially submitted, will be stamped and returned to the Contractor. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Identify each submittal with a cover sheet with the appropriate Specification Division, Section and Paragraph. 3. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 4. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. d. Printed performance curves. e. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. f. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 g. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. h. Additional requirements indicated in Volume 2 of 5 - Divisions 2-16. C. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01400 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Program Manager's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. 4. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, provide the following: a. Size limitations of manufacturer. b. Compliance with recognized standards. C. Availability. d. Delivery time. 5. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3) sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, and details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 6. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit two (2) sets of Samples. Program Manager will retain one (1)Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 7. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Sponsor's property, are the property of Contractor. D. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01320 "Construction Progress Documentation." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -4 F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01290 "Payment Procedures." G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01290 "Payment Procedures." H. Subcontractor and Supplier List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entities performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 2.02 INFORMATIONAL/ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit in electronic PDF format, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. An officer shall sign certificates and certifications or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01400 "Quality Requirements." B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01320 "Construction Progress Documentation." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of Contractor and Sub Contracting firms or persons. Include lists of completed projects with project names, dates and addresses, with contact names, addresses and Telephone numbers of contacts (Owners, Architects or Managers) with other information relevant to assurance of qualifications. D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. F. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. G. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. H. Warranty information: Prepare a Manufacturer Warranty package for Program Manager's review. The Manufacturer Warrantees shall be originals and as defined in the Technical Specifications Divisions 2-16. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 I. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Program Manager. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 PROGRAM MANAGER'S ACTION A. General: Program Manager will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Program Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Program Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, submittals shall be reviewed for conformance with design intent only and such review will not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for fitting and construction of work, nor from furnishing material and work required by the Drawings, Specifications, and related documents which may not be indicated, or which may be indicated differently, on the approved shop drawings. Similarly, such review shall not constitute acceptance of deviations from the Drawings, Specifications, or instructions, nor from local, state, or federal laws, nor regulations or requirements of boards, commissions, or departments having jurisdiction, nor approval of conditions which may involve infringement of patents. C. Informational Submittals: Program Manager will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Program Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6 SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to meet the quality of materials and installations as defined in the individual Technical Specifications Divisions 2-16. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Sponsor, Program Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 3. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Program Manager. C. Testing Agency: Any entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 2. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 3. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. B. Special Tests and Inspections: The Sponsor or Program Manager will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections as required by authorities. 1. Testing agency will notify Program Manager and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Program Manager with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at the time of Substantial Completion or Final inspection, which may include a list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 5. Testing agency will retest and re-inspect corrected work. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Program Manager and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Program Manager and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-4 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": The term "reviewed," when used to convey Program Manager's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Program Manager's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by Program Manager, requested by Program Manager, and similar phrases. D. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. J. The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. REFERENCES 01420 - 1 K. "Project site" is the space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.02 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Program Manager for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Program Manager for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request. E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. F. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) www.aiaonline.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee ANSI American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials www.astm.org REFERENCES 01420 -2 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society www.aws.org CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) www.csinet.org CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org GA Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (Formerly: FGMA- Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com/gana GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org LSGA Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA) NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association www.nelma.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) REFERENCES 01420 - 3 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association www.sigmaonline.org/sigma SMA Screen Manufacturers Association UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org WDMA Window& Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) www.wdma.com WIC Woodwork Institute of California www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com WWPA Western Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org G. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. FBC Florida Building Commission www.floridabuilding.org ICC International Code Council www.iccsafe.org H. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CFR Code of Federal Regulations www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov REFERENCES 01420 -4 DOC Department of Commerce www.doc.gov DOD Department of Defense DOD Specifications and Standards www.astimage.daps.dla.mil/online EPA Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration Department of Transportation www.faa.gov FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (Available from DOD, GSA, and NIBS) FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety& Health Administration (See CFR 29) www.osha.gov PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 REFERENCES 01420 - 5 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Project identification and temporary signs. 2. Field offices. 3. Storage Trailers. 4. Portable Toilet Facilities, 5. Temporary Fencing. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division 1 Section 01700 "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. 3. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Sponsor or Program Manager and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Sponsor's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Program Manager. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Not Used 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Field Offices: As deemed necessary by the Program Manager, the Contractor shall provide a field office with close proximity to the work under this Contract. Field office shall be an air- conditioned space with toilet and telephone facilities available for use. Field office shall be available to Sponsor, Program Manager for meetings or as required to supervise and/or facilitate work of the Contract. Contractor shall provide work space for the Program Manager at the field office. This shall include, but not be limited to: desk or work table, file cabinet, access printing/copying/scanning machine, and telephone. Program Manager shall have access to the field office during normal work hours, as specified herein. C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand-carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Drinking-water fountains, including paper cup supply. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. 3.02 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices,storage sheds,sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities in locations as approved by the Program Manager. 2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 3. Maintain support facilities until Project Substantial Completion. B. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous,dangerous,or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section 01700 "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. 2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -2 information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials. C. Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings. Keep office clean and orderly. 1. Furnish and equip offices as follows: a. Desk and four chairs, four-drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and bookcase. b. Water cooler. 2. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood. 3. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer. Paint interior walls with two coats of interior latex-flat wall paint. 4. Provide resilient floor covering and painted gypsum wallboard walls and acoustical ceiling. Provide operable windows with adjustable blinds and insect screens. 5. Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. Provide 110- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced at not more than 12-foot intervals, 1 per wall in each room. D. Portable Toilets Facilities for Workers: Erect temporary fencing to screen portable toilets from view of Property Owners. Service regularly to prevent nuisance odors and sanitation issues.. E. Storage: This Contractor shall not store materials inside any of the properties. The Contractor shall provide on-site storage container(s),at designated areas on the Project site. 3.03 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. The Sponsor or Program Manager reserve the right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 3 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: Selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01420 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 4. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process,or where indicated as a product substitution,to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to the Property Owner. D. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Property Owner. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. C. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. 3. Initial Submittal: Within ten (10) days after notice to proceed, submit initial product list in electronic PDF format. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4. Completed List: Within fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit a completed product list, indicating all products used in the project in electronic PDF format. Such list should directly correspond to product submittals. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Program Manager's Action: Program Manager will respond in writing to Contractor within fifteen (15) days of receipt of completed product list. Program Manager's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Program Manager's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit each request for consideration in electronic PDF format. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by separate contracts that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. d. Samples, where applicable or requested. e. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses, and names and addresses of architects and sponsors. f. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. g. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. h. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. i. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. j. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -2 k. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Program Manager's Action: If necessary, Program Manager will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one (1)week of receipt of a request for substitution. Program Manager will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Program Manager cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 2. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 3. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 4. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage. B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by construction forces. Coordinate location with Program Manager. 1.06 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories,trim,finish,fasteners,and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. The Sponsor and Program Manager reserve the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Program Manager will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Program Manager's. 6. Single Source Manufacturer: The Contractor must use a single manufacturer to respond to the performance requirements in the Technical Specifications Division 2-16. This requirement is included to prevent two dissimilar products in adjacent locations. If a manufacturer does not provide sizes or styles the Contractor is required to call attention to and request clarification from the Program Manager prior to Order. 7. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics"of products. 8. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term"or equal" or"or approved equal"or"or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: 1. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Program Manager will consider requests for substitution if received within fifteen (15) days after the Notice to Proceed-Permits. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Program Manager. B. Conditions: Program Manager will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Program Manager will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 2. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -4 3. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 6. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 7. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 2.03 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name,submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents,that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses, and names and addresses of architects and sponsor's, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 5 SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General installation of products. 2. Progress cleaning. 3. Protection of installed construction. 4. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01731 "Cutting and Patching" 2. Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" 3. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Examination of the site and pertinent existing buildings shall be made by the Contractor who shall compare it to the Contract Drawings and Specifications to determine the exact amount including that to be removed, altered and/or reconnected. The Contractor shall be satisfied as to the condition under which the work is to be performed and gain complete knowledge of the scope of the work to provide a complete and operable system. No allowances shall subsequently be made for any extra expense to which the Contractor may be accountable due to failure to make such examination and to include the required materials and labor in the bid. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 3.02 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Program Manager and Sponsor in the shop drawings and in writing not less than two (2)days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. B. Field Measurements: Coordinate field measurements for primary products (windows and doors) with a representative from the Manufacturer to ensure correct measurement, order and fit of products. Recheck and verify measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. Refer to Section 1140-1.05 for "Designated Furniture Storage Sketch"for each unit by Program Manager. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Program Manager. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on AIA Form, "Request for Information." 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -2 F. Anchors and Fasteners: The Contractor is to be responsible for installations which are in adherence to the Manufacturer provided installation instructions, Florida Building Code and Florida Product Approval . Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Program Manager. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.04 PROGRESS A. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. B. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. C. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. D. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. E. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. F. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. G. Waste Disposal: Legally dispose of all waste materials off-site. Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -3 3.05 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.06 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01731 "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -4 SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 2. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least ten (10)days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Program Manager's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not alter or cut structural elements without specific engineering approval provided by the Program Manager. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Program Manager's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that,when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -2 C. Dust Control: The Contractor shall provide maximum dust control in both the interior and exterior of the treated condominium units utilizing dust control barriers, coordination of the work to minimize cross ventilation, HEPA vacuums, and water spray. D. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. E. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated,or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine,such as an abrasive saw or a diamond- core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Plaster Surrounds: Where walls require patching to provide new plaster surrounds, provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire wall surface containing the patch to the edges of natural breaks. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Repairing and Replacing Existing Work: All items of existing work which are to remain and are damaged or removed on account of work done under this Contract, including interior and exterior finishes, trim, fixtures, and furnishings, shall be repaired and replaced to match existing adjacent work in all respects. Any damage to buildings, roads, public roads, bituminous concrete areas, fences, lawn areas, trees, shrubbery, poles, underground utilities, etc. shall be made good by the Contractor at his/her own expense, all to the satisfaction of the Program Manager. Following the removal of scaffolding and/or vertical lift stations, the Contractor shall patch and paint all surfaces disturbed by the scaffolding. Patched areas shall match existing adjacent surfaces and shall not be visually discernable from adjacent surfaces. 5. Existing Electrical Items at New Wall/Ceiling Modifications: Where a new wall or ceiling modification (or vertical/horizontal duct enclosure) is being installed, any existing lights, fans, outlets, switches, plugs, telephone jacks, cable jacks, thermostats, etc., or any other item(s), exclusive of security systems, affected by the installation of the new work, are to be extended forward and reinstalled to accommodate the new wall or ceiling modification. Provide new wiring, plug extensions, etc. as required for a complete and operable installation. All work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable codes. Patch all wall/ceiling finishes to match existing thickness before installation of new wall or ceiling modification. 6. Existing Closet Shelving/Casework- Remove/Reinstall at New Work: Where new work is in contact or in conflict with existing shelving, casework, or other finished item, remove and reinstall the item to its original location with necessary modifications to existing items as directed by Architect or unless otherwise noted. Provide new parts to match existing where required for a complete, safe, and secure reinstallation. Provide new trim where required. 7. Existing Floor Finishes -Cut Back/Protect at New Wall/Door Modifications: Where a new door is to be installed, the existing carpeting and/or pad, or other floor finish shall be cut back and reinstalled to accommodate the door installation. Protect existing floor finish during construction. Reinstalled floor finish shall match existing conditions. Provide new tack strips, trim, padding, etc., where required, for a complete and finished installation. Repair Concrete Terrazzo floors where required to provide a solid installation. 8. New Ductwork Penetrations: At New, Wall, or Ceiling Ductwork Openings, the floor,wall and/or ceiling finish affected by new openings shall be repaired to match existing. Openings created for new ductwork shall be no greater than 5/8 inch around the perimeter of the ductwork and shall be filled with fiberglass insulation, backer rod, and sealant(with wood blocking,as required by these specifications). Provide new metal collar(s)and ceiling penetrations. Where new ductwork passes through a closet space, cut back and adjust existing shelves, bracket(s), rods, etc. to accommodate new ductwork. 9. New Ductwork at Finished Ceilings: Where a finished GWB or other ceiling exists in any space designated to receive new ductwork, where designated, provide new duct enclosure as detailed. Provide new ceiling material, finish and components, as required, to match existing for a complete, finished installation. 10. New Work in Closet Space: CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -4 At installation of a new attic access panel or ceiling modification, duct enclosure, etc. or other construction within a closet or kitchen cabinet, remove existing obstruction required for installation of the new work. Adjust, as required, and reinstall the existing item to their original location. Replace any item(s)damaged during the course of removal with new to match existing. If items are not reusable, provide new to match existing. 11. Stucco Matching: Exterior stucco shall be mixed and applied to match existing texture and shall be ready to receive finish paint. If the existing stucco is an integral color material, the new stucco shall match that color. 12. Concrete Masonry Units: Masonry shall be installed using materials which match existing. Fit masonry units into bonding and coursing pattern. Mortar joint width and color to match existing. 13. New Windows/Doors - Remove and Reinstall Items: Where required for the installation of program work; remove existing shutters, planters, etc.,or any other item that obstructs the work. Reinstall the existing materials to the original location with new galvanized fastening devices as required for a complete, secure, and safe reinstallation. 14. New Ceilings - Extend Electrical Items: At new ceiling modifications, all existing ceiling lighting fixtures, smoke alarms, switches, receptacles,fans, or other electrical items(exclusive of security or fire alarm systems)shall be extended forward to accommodate the ceiling modification. This shall include telephone, coaxial, and audio cables. 15. Specialty Finishes: Matching Specialty Wall Finishes including but not limited to: Wallpaper, murals, faux painting, mirrors, etc. will not be required of the Contractor. The Contractor shall minimize any damage to existing finishes beyond the immediate area of work. Patch, Sand, Prime and Paint new surfaces to receive specialty finishes to be installed by others. END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 5 SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01100 "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section 01140 "Work Restrictions"for restrictions on use of the premises due to Owner or tenant occupancy. 3. Division 1 Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 4. Division 1 Section 01731 "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. 5. Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. 6. Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 7. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 1.03 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Property Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be taken away from the Property on the same day they are removed. Removed items shall have no salvage value and shall be carefully removed and turned over to the Property Owner when specifically requested by the Program Manager. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B. Proposed Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit drawing of each unit that clearly indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations of containment areas, and areas for storage of Property Owner's personal items and furniture to remain within the unit. C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work,with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Property Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01310 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Adjacent properties Adjacent Property Owners will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so adjacent Property Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice through the Program Manager of activities that will affect Property Owner's operations. B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Property Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of Field Measurement Visit will be maintained by Property Owner as far as practical. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Program Manager. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Program Manager. D. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.02 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Program Manager and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Property Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Program Manager and Property Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 3 3.04 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb,square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.06 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -4 C. Disposal: Legally dispose of all waste materials offsite in a safe and legal manner. END OF SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 5 SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout. The number of individual Properties and sequential construction dictates that many of these closeout procedures are to be completed on a per Property basis. The close-out activities per Property include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection and Certification procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01290 "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section 01320 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs. 3. Division 1 Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. 5. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples of operating and maintenance and warranty packets for Program Manager's review. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. The Contractor is required to provide thorough inspection and oversight of the completed work prior to the request for the Substantial Completion (punch-list)inspection. The Program Manager will make a determination whether the work of a Property has reached Substantial Completion and will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion for that Property if, in the sole opinion of the Program Manager, it is Substantially Complete. The Program Manager will attach a Punch List of incomplete items to the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1. Should a limited amount of work remain incomplete due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, such as a defective product, which requires replacement, the Contractor may request in writing to the Program Manager that this work be permitted to extend beyond the date required for Final Completion. Should the Program Manager accept the request, the incomplete item shall not be a cause for determination that the Property has not reached Final Completion within the required dates. However, the remaining Punch List items shall be completed within the required dates. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 B. Prerequisites to Substantial Completion: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. Indicate items that are incomplete with request. 1. Each window,door, and each other major product; in a property shall be installed, including trim, painting and other related work. 2. Complete startup testing of mechanical systems. 3. Complete final cleaning, including touchup painting. 4. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes, new and existing, caused by construction. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials and similar items to the Property Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 6. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Program Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Program Manager will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Program Manager, which must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.04 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. The Contractor shall complete the punch list items in a timely manner and within the approved construction period assigned to each unit. The Contractor is required to provide thorough inspection and oversight of the completed punch-list items prior to the request for the Final Completion inspection. 2. Submit certified copy of Program Manager's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Program Manager. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit testing and balancing reports of HVAC systems. 4. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 5. Submit specific,workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, certifications, and similar documents. 6. Provide a copy of the record drawings to the Program Manager for review at or prior to the final inspection. 7. Instruct Property Owner in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 8. Submit complete Property Owner Warranty Manual, containing General Contractors warranty and warranties for all installed products, to Construction Manager pursuant to Section 1770-1.07C "Warranties" B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Program Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Program Manager will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -2 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Refer to Section 01781 "Project Record Documents" 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. B. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. C. Proposed guarantee and warranty documents must be submitted to the Program Manager for review and approval with other required submittals prior to commencement of construction. D. All materials and workmanship, furnished under the Technical Specifications, shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a minimum period of one (1) year from completion of the project except where longer period of warranty is specified. E. The Contractor shall furnish a written warranty for installation of said work for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance. F. The Contractor shall furnish a warranty plan to the Program Manager for review that indicates the procedure for warranty resolution. This plan shall indicate the contact with statement regarding a minimum time period for response and the resolution of issues. G. All guarantees and warranties required in the various sections of the specifications which originate with a Subcontractor or Manufacturer must be delivered to the Program Manager before final payment to the Contractor may be made for the amount of that sub trade of for the phase of work to which the guarantee or warranty relates. Upon final inspection and completion of punch listed items of each Property, as noted by the Program Manager, the Contractor should submit, in duplicate, a package of requested guarantees and warranties for each Property. The warranty packages will include product descriptions, operation and maintenance information suitable for the Property Owners. All of the aforementioned submittals shall be originals as provided by the manufacturer. Photocopies will not be accepted. 1.07 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include in manual, operation, maintenance and warranty data for each type of door, window and mechanical equipment. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Project Identification: a. Property Owner's name, address and Identification Number. b. Contractor's name, address, telephone number. C. Contractor's contact person. d. Identification of scope and time period of warranties. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 e. Certified Copy of Contractor's project warranty for this Property. f. Company name, address, and phone number of each product manufacturer for Property Owner's use for arranging warranty service. 2. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 3. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of manufacturer's warranties and bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and federal and local environmental and anti-pollution regulations. B. Employ a professional cleaning company for all required cleaning to provide a deep cleaning in each completed Property. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion at each Property: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities of rubbish, waste material and other foreign substances. b. Sweep exterior paved areas broom clean. Remove all spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -4 e. Clean all floors, walls, countertops, cabinets, window/door areas, fixed kitchen counters, bathrooms, bedrooms, cabinets and appliances. f. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. g. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. h. Remove labels that are not permanent. i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over"UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. j. Leave Project Site clean and ready for Property Owner use. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. D. Site Restoration: Upon final project closeout, the Contractor shall remove all temporary facilities, barricading, fencing, waste containers, etc. The Contractor shall restore the site including both paved and landscaped areas to "original condition," equal or better than that existing prior to the start of the work as determined by the Program Manager. Landscaped area restoration may include but not be limited to filling, grading, seeding, fertilizing, watering and other maintenance. Restored areas shall be the responsibility of the Contractor until the area has been brought back to "original condition." END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 5 SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of products in those Sections. 3. Project Manual Volume 3 of 5-Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit two (2) initial sets of marked-up Record Prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit final and copies of Record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one (1)original set of Record Drawings and one (1)set of copies per Property with of all change directives at, or prior to the final inspection. The Program Manager will review, initial and date each drawing and request corrections, additional information and advise if the quality of drafting is acceptable. The Program Manager will retain one (1) copy and the Contractor will make corrections to be resubmitted. b. Final Submittal: Submit one (1)set of original marked-up Record Drawings and two (2) sets of copies printed from the Record Drawings. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. Provide two (2) full sets (all Properties)to be forwarded to the Program Manager at the end of the project. PROJECT RECORD 01781 - 1 DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, „�,ubcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible and provide an annotated set for the Program Manager's use at the final inspection. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. b. Actual equipment locations. C. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. d. Changes made following Program Manager's written orders. e. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets in red. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers,Alternate numbers,Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Program Manager. e. Name of Contractor. PROJECT RECORD 01781 -2 DOCUMENTS 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Program Manager's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD 01781 - 3 DOCUMENTS SECTION 03301 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies miscellaneous concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Related Sections include the following: 1. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated submit manufacturer's product data and installation requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as required. 2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Non Shrink rapid setting high strength, hydraulic cement based repair mortar and Non Shrink Grouts for horizontal applications. Comply with the following: 1. Manufacturer: a. QUIKRETE Companies. MISCELLANEOUS 03301 - 1 CONCRETE b. Or Equal. 2. Performance and Physical Properties at 73 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity: a. Compliance: ASTM C 928 R-3 specifications, ASTM C 1107, and CRD 621 b. Working Time, ASTM C 1107: 15-20 minutes. c. Final Set Time, ASTM C 191: 20-45 minutes. d. Compressive Strength, ASTM C 109 Modified: 24 hours 3000 psi 7 days 5000 psi 28 days 6000 psi B. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which materials will be installed. Do not proceed with installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper sequence of construction. Protect adjacent areas from contact due to mixing and handling of materials 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and the following: A. Remove all spalled and unsound concrete from area to be repaired. If rusty reinforcing steel is present; it must be abrasive blasted to remove rust. B. Remove enough material to completely expose reinforcing steel. C. Large vertical or overhead patches deeper than 2" (50 mm) should contain reinforcing steel. Additional steel should be inserted using appropriate techniques, if none is present. D. Clean surface to be repaired of all materials including dust, oil, dirt and grease. E. Dampen with clean water before patching and remove standing water. 3.03 APPLICATION: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and the following: A. Instructions for use as a Repair Mortar 1. Remove all areas of spalled and unsound concrete from surface to be repaired. 2. Dampen surface with clean water before patching. Remove standing water. 3. The repaired areas should be filled by placing material full depth, from one end to the other to eliminate partial depth lifts between batches. 4. Screed and finish to create a surface that matches the surrounding finish. MISCELLANEOUS 03301 -2 CONCRETE 3.04 CURING A. No special curing procedures are required for repair applications. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove excess material before material cures. If material has cured, remove using mechanical methods that will not damage substrate END OF SECTION 03301 MISCELLANEOUS 03301 - 3 CONCRETE SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Reinforcing steel. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 2. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition." 3. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. 2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. UNIT MASONRY 04810 - 1 ASSEMBLIES 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 2. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 2. Provide Type II, non-moisture-controlled units. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 8 inches nominal; 7-5/8 inches actual. 4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. a. Where units are to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. B. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. UNIT MASONRY 04810 -2 ASSEMBLIES D. Water: Potable. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). 2.04 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water. 2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. 1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of Work. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. UNIT MASONRY 04810 - 3 ASSEMBLIES 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION AT WALL INFILLS A. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements ofACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Install galvanized steel masonry ties anchored to existing structure at each course. 3.06 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. END OF SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY 04810 -4 ASSEMBLIES SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Perform all operations and installations required to complete the work of this Section as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. The extent of the rough carpentry is as shown on the Drawings, Scope of Work, and as specified herein. Specific requirements are generally outlined in the "Scope of Work" provided herein for each residence; however, the work under this Section also includes all miscellaneous framing, blocking, fastening and all other incidental work required in support of other work included in this project. B. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. Such work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Cutting, patching, removal of existing framing, new blocking and all other rough carpentry work for complete installation of prime doors, prime windows, mechanical units and ceiling finishes. 2. Furnish, coordinate, and install all other items of rough carpentry necessary for complete and satisfactory installations as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, or reasonably implied by same. C. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking, bucks and nailers. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 3. Division 8 Sections for Doors &Windows for installation of prime doors and windows. 4. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. APA-The Engineered Wood Association. 2. AWPA-American Wood-Preserver's Association. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce. 4. NELMA- Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 5. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority. 6. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 7. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2- inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). Do not use treatment containing CCA(Chromated Copper Arsenate). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following: a. Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA). b. Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quaternary (ACQ). C. Copper-HDO (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). d. Ammoniacal copper citrate (ACC). e. Copper azole, Type A(CBA-A). B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. D. Application: All lumber shall be pressure treated where required by Code and in all interior and exterior uses. 2.03 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species: 1. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA or approved equal. 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. C. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (AS ME B18.2.3.8M). ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. E. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade Al or A4). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. 3.02 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Interior standing and running trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors and Frames"for wood door frames. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and back priming of finish carpentry. 4. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NHLA- National Hardwood Lumber Association. 2. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS- Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SCMA-Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association. 5. SPIB- Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 6. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 7. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of wood and factory-fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and textures. B. Wood Treatment: Wood treatment applicator's certification that moisture content of treated lumber meets specified levels. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Store finish carpentry materials in temperature and humidity-controlled environment similar to that of an occupied home in the project area. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," Section 300, Custom Grade. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of exterior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: B. Moisture Content: Condition wood for interior use prior to installation to moisture content of 8- 13% per piece as recommend by the US Forest Service "Wood Handbook." Condition wood for exterior use prior to installation to moisture content of 10-15%. 2.02 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM (Borate Preservative Treated) A. Trim for Painted Finish: Solid, finished lumber (S4S), pre-primed and borate preservative treated against rot, insects and mold. Use one of the following species and grades: 1. Grade D Select eastern white pine; NELMA or NLGA. 2. Grade D Select white woods; WWPA. B. Kiln-dry material before preservative treatment. Treatment process shall be safe for interior use and must penetrate the entire board and provide a 30-year warranty against Termites (including Formosan) Do not use material that is warped or has a moisture content over 18 percent. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners, Exterior: Provide stainless steel nails in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1- 1/2 inches into substrate. B. Fasteners, Interior: Finish nails and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. C. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing exterior. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. C. Back prime trim for exterior applications. Cut trim to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700, Custom Grade. B. Provide new trim as indicated on Drawings. Drawings may indicate new trim where no similar existing trim is in place. C. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. D. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. E. Install with minimum number of joints using full-length pieces. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. 1. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Tolerances: Comply tolerances per AWI Section 1700 Custom Grade, which include the following: 1. Wood-to-Wood Joints: For flushness variation and gap width of flat surfaces, 0.025"; of shaped surfaces, 0.050". 2. Wood-to-Non-Wood Joints (such as adjacent wall surface): For flushness variation and gap width of flat surfaces, 0.050"; of shaped surfaces, 0.075". FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 3 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. END OF SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -4 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Exteriorjoints in the following vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces: a. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. b. Otherjoints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. C. Otherjoints as indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Sections on Windows and Doors for installation doors and windows. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board. 3. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.07 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Sponsor of other rights Sponsor may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2)years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Twenty (20)years from date of Substantial Completion. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -2 D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Program Manager from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. 2.04 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.05 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 B. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -4 C. Stucco. d. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below: a. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately 2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 b. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1-inch mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. C. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side. 2. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids. C. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 4. Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 3.07 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. Dynomic; Tremco. b. Dynatrol 1; Pecora Corporation. C. Sikaflex- 1 a; Sika Corporation. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, granite, limestone, marble, ceramic tile, and wood. 6. Applications: Sheet Metal, Prime Window, Storm Window, Window and Storm Door Sealant. 3.08 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc. b. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. C. Tremflex 834; Tremco. 2. Applications: Interior Exposed Joint Sealant END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM SWINGING PRIME ENTRY DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Swing Doors: Large Missile Impact-resistant aluminum swing doors, frames, sidelites, transoms, and structural mullions, including aluminum extrusions, finish, glass, door hardware, water-barrier thresholds, and weather strips, for high velocity hurricane zone (HVHZ)construction. 1. Type Designation: EP-VG, EP-OG 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07190—Vapor and Air Barriers. B. Section 07900—Joint Sealants C. Volume 3 of 5-Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA 701/702: Pile weatherstripping and replaceable weather seals. 2. AAMA 2603: Organic coatings on aluminum. 3. AAMA 2605: High-performance organic coatings on aluminum. B. American Society of Civil Engineers 1. ASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. C. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM B 221: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM E 283: Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 3. ASTM E 330: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. ASTM E 331: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. D. Florida Building Code - Building, 2020 FBC (7th Edition): 1. Sections governing construction in a high-velocity hurricane zone (HVHZ). a. FBC 1620: HVHZ Wind Loads (Structural). b. FBC 2410: HVHZ General (Glass and Glazing). C. FBC 2411: HVHZ Windows, Doors, Glass and Glazing. 2. Miami Dade County Test Application Standards (TAS) adopted by FBC: a. TAS 201-94.1: Impact Test Procedures. b. TAS 202-94.1: Criteria for Testing Impact Resistant Building Envelope Components (Uniform Static Air Pressure Method). ALUMINUM SWINGING 08120 - 1 PRIME ENTRY DOORS C. TAS 203-94.1: Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Impact-Resistant Aluminum Window and Door Performance: 1. Structural Test: FBC TAS 202 and ASTM E 330. 2. Water Infiltration Resistance: FBC TAS 202 and ASTM ES47/E 331. 3. Air Infiltration Resistance: FBC TAS 202 and ASTM E 283. 4. Windborne Debris Impact Resistance: Pass large missile impact tests; Florida Building Code, FBC TAS 201. 5. Hurricane Wind Pressure Resistance: After passing large missile impact test, pass cyclic pressure tests following FBC TAS 203. 6. Thermal Performance: U Value 1.10 max. SHGC 0.25 max. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Refer to Section 01330 - Administrative Requirements for complete submittal procedures. Indicate elevations, locations, markings, quantities, materials, head jamb and sill conditions, metal thickness, sizes, shapes, dimensions, finishes and wind pressures. B. Product Data: Provide detailed data on Manufacturers catalog data on each product to be used, including Miami Dade County Product Approval (NOA) and Florida Building Code (FBC) HVHZ Product Approval. C. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Provide two 12"x12" glass samples for review. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 10 years of experience in manufacturing impact- resistant aluminum windows and doors. B. Installer Qualifications: Skilled and experienced to install manufacturer's units of the types specified. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging in a clean, dry area until ready for installation. B. Protect exposed metal and glass surfaces to prevent damage to finish. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Product Warranty: The product manufacturer shall warrant the product against defects in material and workmanship for a period equal to the manufacturer's standard warranty term for the manufactured item but not less than a warranty period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall be non-prorated and fully transferrable. The warranty shall state that the product manufacturer shall provide all materials required to repair or replace defective materials or workmanship. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Failure to meet performance requirements. ALUMINUM SWINGING 08120 -2 PRIME ENTRY DOORS 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. 4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 5. Glass failure. 1.9 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. (Basis of Design)Windoor, Inc. Series 450 Door 2. (Acceptable Alternate) Kawneer Company, Inc. 2000T Terrace Door (with optional 10" bottom rail). 1.10 MATERIALS A. Swing Door Design: 1. Swing Direction: Match existing door swing. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Door Panels: 2 inches (51 mm)thick (nominal)door panels. 3. Complete frame, threshold and weather-stripping. 4. Extruded snap-on glazing beads. 5. Extruded astragal adaptor. 6. Door Features: a. Threshold rated for water resistance. b. Configuration: Out-swing or In-Swing configuration. C. Glazing Beads: Ogee glazing bead profile Exterior. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Outswing Door, Transoms and Sidelites: +/- 75 psf min. with heat strengthened glass and 3-point locking mechanism. C. Air Infiltration Resistance: 1. Outswing and Inswing Door: When closed and locked, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283 entrance doors and frame shall not exceed 0.30 cfm/sq. ft. of glass area at static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf. D. Water Infiltration Resistance: 1. Outswing and Inswing Door: When closed and locked, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E331 and ASTM E 547 there shall be no uncontrolled leakage as defined in the test method at a static air pressure differential of 12 psf. E. Construction: Heavyweight extruded aluminum sections for wet glazing, precision cut and assembled with sealant filled hairline joints and no visible screws. Provide grooves in extrusions to receive 3 lines of weather stripping where doors abut frames. 1. Member Wall Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) minimum; 0.150 inch (3.8 mm) at hardware mounting locations. 2. Member Sizes (widths including glazing beads): a. Top Rail and Stiles: 1.918 inches (48.7 mm)thick by 5.5 inches (157 mm). b. Bottom Rails: 1.918 inches (48.7 mm)thick by 8 inches (203 mm). ALUMINUM SWINGING 08120 - 3 PRIME ENTRY DOORS 3. Sightlines: a. Top Rails: 6.25 inches (15.88 cm). b. Jambs: 6.75 inches (17.146 cm). C. Sills: 8 inches (20.32 cm). 4. Door Corner Construction: Assemble using two 3/8 inch (8.9 mm) threaded compression rods in rails, secured at each end with washers and hex nuts. 5. Glazing Beads: Snap-in design, for interior wet glazing, 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) wall thickness, with at least 0.50 inch (12.7 mm)glass bite for impact-resistant glazing. 6. Finishes: Uniform at all visible surfaces exterior and interior. 7. Residential Hardware: Including concealed three point locking mechanism with integrated key lock cylinder and thumb turn (single action/one step locking). a. Deadbolt Model: Baldwin Traditional Model#8231 b. Lever Model: Baldwin Wave Levers Model#5455 C. Hardware Finish: Satin Nickel PVD 8. Hinges: Hager—4-1/2"x 4" in stainless steel secured w/(8)#12-24x1/2" F.H. M.S. a. (3) per panel up to 7-6 3/4" height b. (4) per panel over 7-6 3/4" height 9. Factory Glazing: 1" Insulating Glass Laminated Unit Makeup. (Glazing at Key West By The Sea shall meet City of Key West Turtle Ordinance requirements and have Visible Light Transmittance (VLT) of 45 percent or less.) Glass shall be similar in appearance to doors installed in previous phases of KWBTS Noise Insulation Program. a. Door Type EP-VG and EP-OG (1" Insulating Glass Makeup (Exterior to Interior): a. 3/16" Clear LoE366#2 Tempered b. 5/16"Airspace filled with Argon Gas c. 7/16" Laminated Glass comprised of: Non-yellowing, non-crazing interlayer sandwiched between two panes of glass, 0.90 inch/90 mil (2.2 mm) Saflex PVB for Large Missile Impact Interlayer Opacity: Clear or Opaque as scheduled in Individual Homeowner Style Selection Sheets 1.11 FINISHES A. AAMA 2605 Kynar Finish: Chromate Pretreatment plus Primer, 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF)coating 1. Color: Standard Bone White ALUMINUM SWINGING 08120 -4 PRIME ENTRY DOORS PART 3 EXECUTION 2. PREPARATION A. Before start of unit installation, check openings for adequacy of pressure preservative treated wood blocking that will receive frames. Check the size, quantity, spacing, clearances, and rigidity of fastenings and their conformance to the specified NOA. 3. PREPARATION A. Coordinate with Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 1. 3/4 inch rectangular pressure preservative treated South Yellow Pine blocking, set in a full bed of sealant. 2. Fasten with to structure with drilled concrete fasteners spaced as required in NOA, so that blocking is continuous and is tightly butted to fill corners of each opening. B. Coordinate with Section 07920 -Joint Sealant 1. Sealant at exterior perimeter of aluminum frames, in deeply grooved stucco or in 1/4 inch (6 mm)gaps where other exterior finish materials terminate next to frames. 2. Sealant in 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) gap at frame interior perimeters where sills and interior finish materials terminate next to frames. C. Perform cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of frames, without damage to finish, as needed to fit project conditions and make watertight. Replace components with damage to exposed finishes. 4. DOOR INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, requirements of NOA for hurricane and impact-resistant construction, and approved shop drawings. B. Set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, requirements of governing NOA, and within specified tolerances. C. Where aluminum surfaces contact alkaline substrates such as concrete or mortar, and metals other than stainless steel or zinc, protect from direct contact by painting reactive substrate and dissimilar metals with a heavy coating of bituminous paint in the field. D. Hang doors and adjust hardware to achieve specified clearances and proper door operation. E. Demonstrate doors and hardware are in good working order. 5. CLEANING A. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper cleaning and maintenance of the products. END OF SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM SWINGING 08120 - 5 PRIME ENTRY DOORS SECTION 08163 ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM SLIDING GLASS DOORS Part 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sliding aluminum-framed glass doors for exterior locations. 1. Type designation: EG B. Related Sections include the following: 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements"for field testing of installed units. 2. Division 7 Section "Sealants" for perimeter sealants. 3. Project Manual Volume 3-Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA-WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11 "North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights" B. AAMA 501.5-07 "Test Method for Thermal Cycling of Exterior Walls" C. AAMA 502 "Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration Products" D. AAMA 611-98 "Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum" E. AAMA 701/702 "Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals" F. AAMA 1503-09 "Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections" G. AAMA 2603-02 "Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels" H. AAMA 2604-05 "Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels" I. AAMA 2605-05 "Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels" J. ANSI Z97.1-2004 "Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings — Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test" K. ASTM B221-14 "Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes" L. ASTM E90-09 "Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements" ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 - 1 M. ASTM E283-00 (2012) "Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Window, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen" N. ASTM E330M-14 "Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference" O. ASTM E331-09 "Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen" P. ASTM E413-10 "Classification for Rating Sound Insulation" Q. ASTM E547-09 "Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference" R. ASTM E966-10e1 "Standard Guide for Field Measurements of Airborne Sound Insulation of Building Facades and Facade Elements" S. ASTM E987-09 "Test Method for Deglazing Force of Fenestration Products" T. ASTM E1332-10a "Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation" U. ASTM E1886-13a "Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials" V. ASTM E1996-12 "Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes" W. ASTM E2068-08 "Test Method for Determination of Operating Force of Sliding Windows and Doors" X. ASTM E2235-04 (2012) "Standard Test Method for Determination of Decay Rates for Use in Sound Insulation Test Methods" Y. ASTM F842-14 "Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Sliding Door Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact" Z. NFRC 100-2014 "Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors" AA. NFRC 200-2014 "Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence" BB. NFRC 303-2014 "Procedure for Constructing a Laminate in Optics" CC. NFRC 500-2014 "Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Condensation Resistance Values" DD.TAS 201-94 "Impact Test Procedures" EE.TAS 202-94 "Criteria for Testing Impact and Nonimpact Resistant Building Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure" FF. TAS 203-94 "Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading" 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. All sliding glass doors will have one operating panel and one stationary panel. The stationary panel will have the option of being opened with a thumb turn lock. Door handing shall match existing conditions unless otherwise noted. ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 -2 B. Except as otherwise indicated, provide door units complying with requirements of TAS 201, 202, 203 Classification Performance Grade doors. Doors for this project will be able to withstand a design load of(+70 psf)/(-70 psf). C. Uniform Load Deflection Test 1. With the panel in a closed position, test in accordance with ASTM E330M-14/TAS 202-94 with a static air pressure difference of 70 pounds per square foot, pressure to be applied both positively and negatively. 2. Static air pressure difference shall be 1.5 times the design pressure used in 1.03 A (1.5 is the factor used to provide a margin of safety in aluminum doors and is the minimum recommended by the AAMA). 3. The door shall be evaluated for deflection during each load, for permanent damage after each load and for any effects on normal operation. D. Uniform Load Structural Test 1. With the panel in a closed position, test in accordance with ASTM E330M-14 with a static air pressure difference of 105 pounds per square foot, pressure to be applied both positively and negatively. 2. Static air pressure difference shall be 1.5 times the design pressure used in 1.03 A (1.5 is the factor used to provide a margin of safety in aluminum doors and is the minimum recommended by the AAMA). 3. At conclusion of the test, there shall be no glass breakage; permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms, or actuating mechanisms, nor any other damage which would cause the door to be inoperable. Permanent deformation of any frame, panel, or ventilator member shall not exceed L/175 of its span. E. Air Infiltration 1. With the panel in a closed and locked position, the door shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283-12 and shall meet the following performance requirements. a. Air infiltration shall not exceed 0.89 cfm/ft2 at 6.27 psf. F. Water Resistance 1. With the panel in the closed and locked position, the door shall be subjected to a pressure drop of 10.75 psf minimum. All tests shall be performed with the screen removed. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E547-09/TAS 202-94. G. Thermal Performance 1. When tested in accordance with NFRC 100-2014 the thermal transmittance due to conduction (Uc)shall not exceed 0.51 on the entire specimen. 2. When tested in accordance with NFRC 500-2014 the Condensation Resistance enumerator(CR)shall not be less than 45 on the entire specimen. 3. When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503-09 the Condensation Resistance Factor enumerator(CRF)shall not be less than 62 on the entire specimen. ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 - 3 4. When tested in accordance with NFRC 201-2014 the Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC)shall be less than 0.25. G. Forced Entry Resistance 1. When tested in accordance with ASTM F842-14, the door shall perform to a minimum Performance Level 10. H. Sound Transmission 1. Sound Transmission Class (STC). When tested in accordance with ASTM E90-09, the door shall perform to a minimum STC-41. Testing shall be performed in a NVLAP Certified Test Laboratory. 2. Outdoor Indoor Transmission Class (OITC). When tested in accordance with ASTM E1332-10a, the door shall perform to a minimum of OITC-33. Testing shall be performed in a NVLAP Certified Test Laboratory. I. Turtle Code Glass 1. Meet requirements of Florida Building Code and City of Key West Turtle protection Ordinance. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. II testing shall be performed by an independent architectural testing laboratory accredited by the American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA), the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) and the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) and such other accreditation as may be required by state of local building regulations. B. The manufacturer shall provide the architect and Program Manager a notarized affidavit of compliance certifying that the doors furnished for this project are identical in every aspect of design, component parts (including sealants and the application thereof, reinforcing members, etc.) and fabrication techniques as the doors tested in the laboratory for which test reports have been furnished. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, certified attachments, operational clearances, and the following: 1. Details, including reinforcement and stiffeners, Joinery, drainage, glazing. 2. Color and finish samples. 3. Type of caulking and installation protection of dissimilar materials. C. Samples: When requested by the Program Manager, provide samples as indicated that show fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. 1. Corner Sample: Corner of door approximately 12 inches by 12 inches with frame, sash and glazing. 2. Main Framing Member: 12-inch- long, full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish. ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 -4 3. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Submit Independent Laboratory Test Reports verifying doors meet the specified requirements for air leakage, water resistance, uniform structural load, operating force, deglazing, thermal performance, condensation resistance factor, glazing wind load, and sound transmission. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. E. Provide current Florida Building Commission Product Approval exhibiting conformance with requirements of this specification section and windborne debris and impact in compliance with Florida Building Code. F. Certificates: Furnish an affidavit in triplicate from the Door Manufacturer, certifying that materials used on this Project conform to these Specifications and are identical in all appropriate respects to windows identified in the Independent Laboratory Test Reports. G. Sample Warranty: Furnish Sample Warranty issued by the Door Manufacturer meeting warranty requirements of this Section. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: The product manufacturer shall warrant the product against defects in material and workmanship for a period equal to the manufacturer's standard warranty term for the manufactured item but not less than a warranty period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall be non-prorated and fully transferrable. The warranty shall state that the product manufacturer shall provide all materials required to repair or replace defective materials or workmanship. The warranty shall further state that parts used to manufacture the door units, or suitable replacements, shall be available throughout the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Failure to meet performance requirements. 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. 4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 5. Glass failure. ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 - 5 Part 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design is the Series SCW5000 — Sliding Glass Door Impact as manufactured by St. Cloud Window, Inc., 390 Industrial Blvd. Sauk Rapids, MN 56379. Phone: 800-383-9311 Fax: 320-255-1513 [www.stcloudwindow.com] B. Or Approved Equal C. Terminology used herein may include reference to that manufacturer's proprietary products. Such references shall be construed only for the purpose of establishing the quality of materials and workmanship to be applied under this section and shall not be construed as limiting competition. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions 1. Shall be extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6 per ASTM B221-14. 2. All primary panel and frame members shall have a nominal extrusion wall thickness of minimum 0.08". 3. Sill frame shall consist of thermally-broken, extruded aluminum, including a baffled weep system to drain precipitation. B. Insect Screen 1. All screen frames to be tubular extruded aluminum, finished with screen mesh, securely held in place by means of reusable foam spline. Roll-formed screen frames shall not be accepted. 2. Provide screens on operating panels as indicated on the architectural plans. 3. Mesh to be: Fiberglass C. Thermal Barrier 1. Provide continuous extruded high performance nylon 6/6 polyamide with multi- directional 25% glass fiber reinforcing as manufactured by Technoform or equal. All polyamide material must be from a minimum of 90% virgin components, with a maximum 10% pre-consumer regrind. Aluminum components shall be mechanically crimped into cross knurled cavities and obtain a minimum composite shear value of 800 pounds for a 4" section. Rolled in PVC, single directional glass fiber reinforced polyamide and pour and de-bridge Urethane thermal break systems will not be acceptable. D. Weather-stripping 1. All intersections of panels to frame shall be double weather-stripped with 100% woven pile and 5-fin conforming to AAMA 701/702. Weather-stripping to be secured within extruded shapes of the aluminum profiles to prevent movement. Surface/adhesive applied weather strip shall not be accepted. ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 - 6 E. Hardware 1. The operating panel shall have a thumb turn lock that engages into the jamb frame to lock the panel in a closed position. The lock shall be set at a predetermined height to allow the end user to close and lock the door at their level of comfort. 2. The stationary panel shall have a W, heat-stabilized nylon plug, filling the access hole. 3. The stationary panel shall have a thumb turn lock that engages into the jamb frame to lock the panel in a closed position. The lock shall be set at a predetermined height to allow the end user to close and lock the door at their level of comfort. 4. The operable panel shall have a handle fastened onto the panel jamb interior and exterior. The handle shall be set at a predetermined height to allow comfortable operation by the end user. 5. Panel rollers: All operable panels shall have a minimum of two adjustable rollers. Each roller consists of two polyamide covered steel wheels, adjustable housing, operating on steel ball bearings, encased in grey polyamide. Rollers, recessed into the bottom panel rail, shall be installed by tightening the clamping grub screw with an Allen wrench. 6. Anti-Takeout Blocks: One anti-takeout block shall be fastened with a screw above each operating panel to prevent panel removal. F. Glazing 1. All doors to be fully factory glazed with 1'/2' overall insulated glass. 2. All glass shall be structurally glazed. 3. A continuous polyshim tape will be used on the exterior glazing leg and a continuous silicone cap bead over the polyshim bonding to the glass edge to prevent moisture from intruding into the door system. A continuous silicone heel bead shall be applied around the interior perimeter to prevent glass removal. 4. Nominal glass thickness and type shall be: a) Exterior glass lite i. Thickness: 1/8", .030 PVB gray interlayer, 1/8" ii. Tint: gray iii. Type: laminated iv. Coating: Low E b) Air Space - 11/16" c) Interior glass lite i. Thickness: 1/4", .090 PVB, 1/4" ii. Tint: clear iii. Type: annealed iv. Coating: Low E ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 - 7 (Glazing at Key West By The Sea shall meet City of Key West Turtle Ordinance requirements and have Visible Light Transmittance (VLT)of 45 percent or less.) 2.03 FABRICATION A. Door shall consist of multiple panel units installed within one frame. The mitered panel units shall be interlocked in the closed position by RPVC, UV-resistant black capstock interlock and two sets of weather-stripping. All joints of the panel, frame, and screen frame shall be securely joined by structural corner keys, threaded screws installed into the aluminum extruded screw ports, and Dow neutral cure sealant. The meeting rail shall be fastened to the jamb panel with screws. All sharp corners of the panel, frame and screen frame shall be deburred. Door unit is to be constructed in a manner that will facilitate the replacement of worn or damaged parts, hardware, or weather-strip. 2.04 FINISH A. Interior and Exterior: Polyvinylelidene Fluoride PVDF Organic Coatings: Finish shall be 70% fluoropolymer (PVDF)organic coating in a color selected by Architect. Applied coatings shall meet or exceed AAMA 2605-05, including 10 years Florida exposure and 4000 hours humidity tests Color to be: White Part 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All door and related door components shall be installed in accordance with local building codes, requirements of the Program Manager, and the approved shop drawings of the Manufacturer. Installation shall be by a contractor who is experienced and who shall document at least one or more projects of similar nature and scope for which the door products were successfully installed. B. All materials shall be erected plumb, level and true, relative to the building structure. The maximum variation from plumb and level shall not exceed 1/8" (plus or minus) over ten feet. C. Approved insulation materials shall be installed in the frame cavity on the interior portion of the door frame. Area adjacent to the exterior of the door frame shall remain un- insulated. The door installer shall use caution in the insulation operation to avoid overlapping insulation materials across the thermal-barrier connector thus bridging the two separate frame members. 3.02 CAULKING A. An approved sealant compound as approved by the Architect, shall be applied per the installation drawings and details at all points where the aluminum master frame and/or panning intersects the masonry or other exterior wall finish. The caulking shall be applied in a manner which ensures a continuous air and water-tight perimeter seal. Color to match the color of the aluminum doors unless specified otherwise by the Architect. ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 - 8 3.03 TESTING A. Laboratory Testing 1. At the discretion of the Program Manager, one or a number of operable panels shall be removed from doors installed on the project and exchanged with the appropriate attic stock. The selected stock shall be tested by a certified testing laboratory to verify that glass, glazing, hardware and finish are in conformance to the project specification. Should any component of the test specimen fail to conform to project specification, action shall be taken by the door manufacturer to correct each deficiency for every door on the project at no additional cost to the Program Manager. 2. The Program Manager shall assume the cost of the initial verification testing. However, should product be found to be non-compliant, the manufacturer shall reimburse the Program Manager for the cost of the initial test. At the architect's discretion, subsequent testing may be required, and the cost of this test shall be borne by the manufacturer. B. Field Testing 1. On-site testing shall be conducted at Program Manager's discretion and expense. Up to three test specimens shall be selected by Program Manager or architect. 2. On-site testing shall be conducted for air infiltration and water leakage as specified in section 1.04 — A and B, by an AAMA-certified architectural testing laboratory in accordance with AAMA 502, Method B. 3. On-site testing shall be conducted for sound transmission as specified in section 1.04 — F and G, by NAVLAP-certified acoustic testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM E966-10e1 and include flanking test. Using ASTM E413-10 and ASTM E1332-10a, respectively, specimens tested in the field shall be within five (5) points of the laboratory STC test results and three (3) points of the laboratory OITC test results furnished with product qualification. 4. If a test specimen shall fail any aspect of the field test, it shall be repaired or replaced and re-tested. At the architect's direction, up to three (3) additional doors may be tested. Upon completion of re-testing, all door units shall be repaired or replaced in the same manner as the test specimen (s) to assure compliance with project performance specification. 5. The cost of re-testing and all subsequent repairs and other associated expenses shall be borne by the door manufacturer and/or Contractor. 3.04 ADJUSTMENTS, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING A. After installation, the erector shall remove all sealants, caulking and other misplaced materials from all surfaces, including adjacent work. The door frame, panel and glass shall be cleaned thoroughly with materials and methods recommended by the door and glass manufacturers and shall not cause any defacement of the work. B. Installer shall make any and all adjustments to door panel and hardware to cause the operating panel to function properly and in accordance with the manufacturer's standards. ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 - 9 C. Protection of glass and door materials: Protect from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. After installation and cleaning of doors by door contractor, the general contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the cleanliness and protection of the door from damage from other trades. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the work from damage by other trades. END OF SECTION 08163 ALUMINUM ACOUSTICAL SLIDING GLASS DOORS 08163 - 10 SECTION 08215 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Stile and rail interior wood doors. Type: IW-2P B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware"for gasketing and operating hardware. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for requirements for glass in doors. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finish. 4. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 2. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. C. Door Schedule: Provide schedule for doors indicating location, construction, style and performance requirements for each door. D. Certification: Provide manufacturer's certification that doors meet AWI requirements, and that doors meet specified performance requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." WOOD DOORS 08215 - 1 C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of a similar type and quality of doors specified for not less than five consecutive years. D. It is a requirement of this contract that the manufacturer's representative for the windows and doors be on site for the installation of the first three (3) homes and the pre-construction measurements meetings on the first three homes. E. Product Options: The sizes, profiles, dimensional requirements, and aesthetic effects of the doors included in the Contract Documents are part of the design of the Project. Other door manufacturers whose products have equal performance characteristics may be considered provided deviations in size, profile, and dimensions are minor and do not alter the aesthetic effect as judged solely by the Designer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. Do not use shipping package for storage. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. C. Store doors flat on carefully leveled supports in a dry, well ventilated building. Cover to keep clean, but allow air circulation. If doors are stored more than one week, seal edges prior to storing. D. Do not subject stored doors to extremes of heat, dry or humid conditions. E. Do not drag doors across one another. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warrant the product against defects in material and workmanship for a period equal to the manufacturer's standard warranty term for the item but not less than a warranty period of 1 year. The manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. The warranty shall be written to the Property Owner (not the purchaser)and shall be transferrable to future Property Owners without additional registration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Type IW 1. Solid Core Wood Doors: a. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. b. Vancouver Door Company, Inc. WOOD DOORS 08215 -2 C. VT Industries Inc. d. Lynden Door, Inc. 2. Stile and Rail Doors: a. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. b. JELD-WEN Premium Wood Doors. C. The Maiman Company. d. Woodtech. 2.02 WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. B. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. C. Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. 2.03 SOLID CORE WOOD A. Quality Standard: AWI Section 1300, Custom Grade; except as specified otherwise for individual components or fabrication. B. Construction: 1. Core: Particleboard, or manufacturer's proprietary core as required for specified acoustic rating. a. Particleboard Cores: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 3. Construction: 5-ply; stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive sanded before veneering. Apply faces with hot-press laminating; cold-press not acceptable. 4. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. C. Faces: 1. For Transparent Finish: (Grade A faces): Rift cut white oak or other approved species to match existing doors to remain. Manufacturer's standard veneer matching. 2. For Painted Finish: Medium-density overlay. 2.04 STILE AND RAIL DOORS A. Quality Standard: AWI Section 1400, Custom Grade; except as specified otherwise for individual components or fabrication. B. Wood Species and Cut: Solid lumber (Type IW— Pine C. Construction: 1. Stiles and Rails: Laminated solid lumber with veneered faces. 2. Sticking: Ovolo, milled integrally with stile. Applied sticking not acceptable, except on glazed panels, one side may be applied. 3. Panels: Solid lumber with veneer faces. 4. Adhesives: Type 1, exterior. WOOD DOORS 08215 -3 5. Pressure treat after fabrication. Apply second treatment to bottom of door after machining. D. Component Dimensions: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than the following: 1. Door Thickness: 1-3/8 inches Type IW, 1-3/4 inches Type EW. 2. Stile Width: 5-3/8 inches. 3. Top Rail Width: 4-1/2 inches. 4. Lock Rail Width: 7-1/2 inches. 5. Bottom Rail Width: 10 inches. 6. Panel Thickness: 1-1/8 inches. 7. Panel Rim Edge Thickness: 1/2 inch. E. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. F. Louvered Doors: Where indicated, provide stile and rail doors with louvers. Provide fixed slats secured in routed slots in door stiles. 2.05 WOOD DOOR FRAMES AND JAMBS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900, Custom grade. B. Size: 1-3/8 inch, by 4-9/16 inches, 5-3/16 inches, 6-9/16 inches or to match thickness of wall. C. Wood Species and Cut for Opaque Finish: Douglas Fir or Ponderosa Pine. D. Fabricate frames to custom size to fit existing rough opening. Prepare frames for hardware, and preassemble doors, frames and gasketing in shop to the maximum extent practical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify that door and frame are sized correctly for the rough opening. B. Verify that rough framing and jamb have been reinforced as required for installation of acoustic wood doors which are heavier than conventional solid core doors. C. Nail, screw, patch, shim and otherwise make existing openings plumb, level, smooth and satisfactory to receive new doors and frames. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Advise the Designer immediately if existing framing at rough opening is soft or rotted, or if masonry is spalled or otherwise deteriorated. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. WOOD DOORS 08215 -4 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer. Machine doors for hardware. Double-seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. Including areas routed for hardware. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges. D. Coordinate field finishing of doors with the requirements of Division 9 Section "Painting" to ensure that doors are finished immediately after fitting, and prior to hanging. 3.03 DOOR FRAMES A. Install frames plumb and level. Shim frames with solid stock. B. Fasten frames securely to prevent flexing, bowing or twisting of frame due to the weight of the door. Do not rely on installation of door casings to provide support to door frame. Provide long screws at hinges as required in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. 3.05 DOOR SCHEDULE A. Door Type: IW-2P 1. Product: Interior stile and rail (panel)door. 2. Thickness: 1-3/8 inches. END OF SECTION 08215 WOOD DOORS 08215 -5 SECTION 08520 ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Acoustical impact resistant aluminum dual double hung windows. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry". 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry". 3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". 4. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC), and Wood Windows and Glass Doors. B. AAMA 605.2 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. C. AAMA 1503.1 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors, and Glazed Wall Sections. D. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. E. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. F. ASTM E 547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. Or ASTM E 331-93 - "Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Air Pressure Difference". G. ASTM F 588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact. H. Florida Building Code 2020 (7th Edition). ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Minimum size required by gateway performance requirements for determining compliance with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for both gateway performance requirements and optional performance grades. B. Design Requirements: 1. Double hung units; thermally broken aluminum dual sash units conforming to, or exceeding, H-DW-C70 per AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. In meeting AAMA/NWWDA 101 product designations, the maximum size tested for compliance with specified product performance grades must be equal to or larger than each product type used in the project, however, may be less than the defined "gateway" size specified for each product type. 2. Sound Transmission: All windows fixed and operating shall have an STC Rating not less than 40. Select window system glazing to meet or exceed all design and performance requirements. C. Performance Requirements (Operable Units): 1. Air Infiltration: Test window in accordance with ASTM E 283, primary sash closed and locked, secondary sash full open position; meet the following performance requirements: a. Windows with Operable Perimeter: Not more than 0.150 cubic feet per minute per square foot of window area at a static pressure drop of 1.57 pounds per square foot, or 0.35 cubic feet per minute total when tested at 6.24 pounds per square foot. 2. Water Resistance: Test window in accordance with ASTM E 547 or ASTM E 331-93, in the winter and summer mode with screen removed, as follows: a. Primary sash closed and locked, secondary sash full open position; subject window to pressure drop of 9.00 pounds per square foot. b. Both sets of sash closed and latched; subject window to minimum pressure drop of 12.00 pounds per square foot. 3. Windborne Debris resistance: Provide glazed windows capable of resisting large and small missile impact according to the requirements of the latest edition of the Florida Building Code. 4. Uniform Load Structure Test: Test window in accordance with ASTM E 330, primary sash closed, secondary sash full open position. a. Static air pressure difference of 1.5 times design wind class used in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. b. At Conclusion of Test: No glass breakage; no permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms, or actuating mechanisms; no other damage which would cause window to be inoperable; permanent deformation of any frame, sash, or ventilator member not exceeding 0.04 percent of its span. 5. Thermal Performance ("U" Value): Test window of exactly 4 by 6 foot size in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. a. Double Hung Units: Thermal transmittance due to conductance not exceeding 0.65. 6. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Test window of exactly 4 by 6 foot size in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. a. Double Hung Units: CRF not less than 62. (verify CRF) b. Horizontal Rolling Units: CRF not less than 64. (verify CRF) 7. Forced Entry Resistance: ASTM F 588. a. Horizontal Rolling Windows: Level 10 minimum. b. Double Hung windows: Level 10 minimum. ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -2 8. Deglazing Test: Operating sash will have no disengagement of the sash stiles and rails from the glass, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 987-88, when a load of 70 LBS is applied to the stiles of the horizontal sliding window and rails of the removable panel and vertical sliding windows and a load of 50 LBS is applied to the rails of the horizontal sliding window and stiles of the removable panel and vertical sliding windows. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Less than 0.25 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, certified attachments, operational clearances, and the following: 1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 3. Flashing and drainage details. 4. Thermal-break details. 5. Glazing details. 6. Muntin profiles. 7. Color and finish samples. 8. Type of caulking and installation protection of dissimilar materials. C. Samples: When requested by the Program Manager, provide samples as indicated that show fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. 1. Corner Sample: Corner of window approximately 12 inches by 12 inches with frame, sash and glazing. 2. Main Framing Member: 12-inch- long, full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish. 3. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type, grade, and size of aluminum window. Submit Independent Laboratory Test Reports verifying windows meet the specified requirements for air leakage, water resistance, uniform structural load, operating force, deglazing, thermal performance, condensation resistance factor, glazing wind load, and sound transmission. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. E. Provide current Florida Building Commission Product Approval for each type of window exhibiting conformance with requirements of this specification section and windborne debris and impact in compliance with Florida Building Code. F. Certificates: Furnish an affidavit in triplicate from the Window Manufacturer, certifying that materials used on this Project conform to these Specifications and are identical in all appropriate respects to windows identified in the Independent Laboratory Test Reports. G. Sample Warranty: Furnish Sample Warranty issued by the Window Manufacturer meeting warranty requirements of this Section. ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Fabrication shall be by a Window Manufacturer who can furnish evidence to the Sponsor that it has been for not less than five (5) consecutive years, regularly engaged in the manufacturing of aluminum window units similar in design and performance to those specified for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to the Program Manager for installation of acoustical product required for this Project. The window installation contractor shall show proof that they have engaged in residential and commercial aluminum window installation and replacement for a minimum of 5 consecutive years, with at least 10 projects that are equal in scope and size to this Project. The window contractor shall provide a full-time lead installer/superintendant; responsible for supervising acoustical window and door installation. The lead installer/superintendant shall have a minimum of 5 years continuous experience as lead installer of window/door installation projects equal in size and scope to this Project. C. It is a requirement of this contract that the manufacturer's representative for the windows and doors be on site for the pre-construction measurements and provide training and supervision for the installation. D. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field-testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Program Manager, except with Program Manager's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Program Manager for review. F. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Provide AAMA certified aluminum windows with an attached label. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. H. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide a manufacturer's representative during the measurement walk-throughs to verify measuring methodology and substrate conditions with Contractor and Program Manager. I. Mockup Installation: Provide a complete installation including associated trim, flashing, sealants and other components of up to two (2)separate window openings, as selected by the Architect, to reveal existing conditions and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. The window manufacturer will be required to have a full-time employee available for the duration of the mockup installation to instruct the contractor on proper installation methods and ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -4 techniques. The manufacturer's employee will have a minimum of five (5) years with the manufacturer in the installation of similar acoustical windows produced by the manufacturer. Exact window configuration and locations will be selected by the Architect. The installation shall be by mechanics that are skilled and experienced in the installation of aluminum acoustical windows. The contractor shall allow for up to two consecutive 8 hours days for the installation of the mock-ups. 1. Approved mockups will become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to aluminum windows including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: The product manufacturer shall warrant the product against defects in material and workmanship for a period equal to the manufacturer's standard warranty term for the manufactured item but not less than a warranty period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall be non-prorated and fully transferrable. The warranty shall state that the product manufacturer shall provide all materials required to repair or replace defective materials or workmanship. The warranty shall further state that parts used to manufacture the window units, or suitable replacements, shall be available throughout the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Failure to meet performance requirements. 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. 4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 5. Glass failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Dual Window: a. St. Cloud Windows, Inc.; Model 900i Series. b. Approved Equal B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 1 Section "Product Requirements"with exception noted below. C. Provide all aluminum windows from a single manufacturer. ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 5 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than accurately extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6. B. Frame, Sash, and Screen Members: Accurately extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6; 0.062 inch minimum wall thickness. C. Thermal Barrier: Not a structural part of frame assembly, but providing complete metal to metal separation between inner and outer frame members; not less than 1/4 inch wide. Poured and debridged polyurethane thermal barrier is not acceptable. D. The following Sections, Reinforcing Members, Anchors, Clips, and Accessories, Fasteners are intended as a guide and are to be confirmed by the certifying engineer for anchorage and conformance to the ASCE load requirements. E. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. Cadmium-plated steel fasteners are not permitted. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. F. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressures. Cadmium-plated steel anchors, clips, and accessories are not permitted. G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Cadmium-plated steel reinforcing members are not permitted. H. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. I. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard or custom weatherstripping to meet performance requirements. J. Caulking: Grade "A" type caulking compound, Pecora, Tremco, Vulkem, or equal approved by Architect; color to match color of aluminum unless otherwise approved by Program Manager. K. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's standard, permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. L. Trim Pieces: Provide brick molds; installation flanges, mullion covers; and head, jamb, and sill extenders as manufactured by manufacturer of window to complete installation and to meet structural requirements. ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 6 M. Sash Rollers: Nylon glides, Delrin, or stainless steel lubricated with "Moly B" dry lubricant, operating on stainless steel axles, based on size and weight of sash. N. Screens: All horizontal and vertical sliding windows shall have a half screen mounted in the outer sash track of the exterior frame. The screen shall be pre-bowed, extruded 6063-T6 aluminum with a nominal wall thickness of .062. The screen cloth shall be fiberglass 18 x 14 mesh or better in a charcoal color and secured into screen frame with a black vinyl spline. O. Muntins: Where grilles are noted in the Drawings, provide manufacturer's profiled applied aluminum muntin on the interior and exterior glass surface of the exterior window sashes. Finish on muntins is to match finish of window. 2.03 HARDWARE A. All assembly and installation fasteners and screws incorporated in the window units, exterior panning and interior trim shall be non-magnetic, stainless steel. All hardware parts shall be of aluminum, stainless steel, nylon, or other non-corrosive materials compatible with aluminum. NOTE: Wrought metal parts will not be acceptable. B. All horizontal sliding windows will be fitted with a sash retainer at the meeting rail to prevent the sash or screen from being removed or pushed to the exterior beyond the plane of the window. C. Spring-loaded metal plunger type lock automatically engaging as window is closed; locate as follows: 1. Double Hung Windows: Interior sill rails. 2.04 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: Defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Source Limitations for Glass: For each manufactured product, obtain glass from one primary- glass manufacturer for each tint color indicated. Window glazing tint shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. C. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. Provide safety glass where required by code. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with requirements and that meet or exceed AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 performance requirements for the window type and performance class indicated above. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. 1. Fabricate windows as two separate frames permanently interlocked by a rigid thermal barrier. ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 7 2. Operable Frame and Sash Joints: Butt type secured by means of thread-cutting type screws anchored into screw ports, ports integral parts of frame members. 3. Frame corners with permanent cross-linked polyethylene gasket corners, secured with non-magnetic stainless steel screws into integral screw ports. 4. Deburr and make smooth all sharp milled edges and corners. 5. Internally seal sash corners. 6. Fabricate meeting rails of tubular construction, double weather-stripped and interlocked when in closed position. 7. Fabricate window units in a manner to facilitate replacement of worn or damaged parts, hardware, or weather-stripping. 8. Exterior and Interior Frame Sill: Tubular design, 5 degrees minimum continuous slope with no interior flat surfaces to prevent accumulation of water in sill. B. Thermal Barrier: Interlock both halves of frame, securing them together without inhibiting expansion and contraction of either part; apply bead of sealant into recessed sealant pocket to complete perimeter of window to seal joints between frame and thermal barrier. 1. Thermal Movement: The thermal-break shall allow for free linear movement between the interlocking thermal-break and the separate aluminum members to accommodate expansion and contraction. The temperature range shall be OF to +200F at exterior (metal temperatures), with a +70F indoor air temperature. No screws, clips or metal straps will bridge the thermal-break or restrict the independent expansion or contraction of the frame members. C. Weep System: The sill weep system shall be designed and constructed to prevent the infiltration of air, dirt and insects from the outside to the interior, and provide ample opening relative to the window size, to prevent the accumulation of water. Weep flaps shall be counter- balanced and gravity operated, opening to exhaust water and closing to help prevent air- leakage and infiltration of insects. D. Mullions: Provide mullions FBC Product Approved mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. E. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. F. Double Hung Windows: 1. Fully balance each operating sash exceeding 20 lbs. in weight with a minimum of two balances. 2. Make sashes removable without the use of special tools. 2.06 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum windows, panning, and trim as follows: ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 8 1. Organic Coated: Fluoropolymer organic coating, white; meet or exceed AAMA 2605 specifications for high performance organic coatings on extrusions. Kynar based 70% resin. D. See Drawings for color choices. Windows noted as White shall be finished with organic coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; operational clearances; and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove new window units from crating and packaging material. Verify that all parts and accessories are included. All window units and accessories shall be securely stored, upright and protected from the weather. B. Remove old windows and accessories from the window opening. Scrape and remove existing sealant from the opening that will interfere with the installation of new windows. C. Install only preservative treated lumber, as required, for all liners and blocking. All liners, sub- framing or new framing shall be the full length of the head, jambs and sill. The shimming surfaces will be of adequate depth to shim the entire depth of the new window frame and to prevent contact of aluminum window frame to preservative treated lumber. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. At the commencement of installation, the window manufacturer shall furnish a full time employee for a minimum of two consecutive 8 hours days at the start of construction to instruct the contractor on proper installation methods and techniques and a minimum of two 8 hours days of follow-up visits during the remaining installation period. The manufacturer's employee will have a minimum of five (5) years installation experience with the manufacturer with demonstrated experience in measuring and installation of manufacturer's products. B. All window and related window components shall be installed in accordance with requirements of the owner and the approved shop drawings of the Manufacturer. Installation shall be by mechanics that are skilled and experienced in the erection of aluminum acoustical windows. C. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components; Drawings; and Shop Drawings. ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 9 D. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. E. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. F. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. G. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. H. Install approved insulation materials in the frame cavity on the interior portion of the window frame, area adjacent to exterior of window frame remaining uninsulated. 1. Exercise caution to avoid overlapping insulation materials across thermal barrier connectors. 2. Exercise caution to avoid bridging of the two separated frame members. I. Apply caulking at all points between masonry and aluminum outer frame; apply in a manner to ensure airtight and watertight continuous perimeter seal. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION 08520 ACOUSTICAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 10 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of door hardware: 1. Hinges, locks and trim for swinging doors. 2. Sliding hardware for by-pass doors. 3. Weatherstripping and gasketing. 4. Thresholds. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry". 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry". 3. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation". 4. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". 5. Volume 3 of 5-Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports &Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples: 1. Submit samples in specified finish for the following: a. Locks and latches. b. Door gasketing. C. Thresholds. 2. Samples that are acceptable will be returned to the Contractor and may be incorporated into the Work. C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepare by or under the supervision of supplier. Coordinate Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Organization: Organize into door hardware sets indicating designations of items required for each opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish. b. Manufacturer. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Door and frame sizes and materials. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. 1.05 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Sponsor of other rights Sponsor may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Not less than (1)years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HINGES A. Hinges: Full mortise butt hinge, flat button tip and as follows: 1. 1-3/8" Doors: Standard weight, 4 by 4 inch. 2. 1-3/4" Doors: Standard weight, anti-friction, 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inch; heavy weight where scheduled. B. Products: Provide one of the following or equal: 1. Hager Companies. 2. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. 3. Stanley Works - Hardware Division. C. Swinging Exterior Doors: Provide nonremovable pins with set screw in hinge barrel. D. Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws with finish to match surface of hinges. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -2 1. Wood Doors: Threaded-to-the-head wood screws. 2. Metal Doors: Machine screws, with drilled and tapped holes. 2.02 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Manufacturers: Provide one of the following or equal: 1. Schlage Lock Company; Div. of IR Security and Safety. 2. Sargent Manufacturing; an Assa Abloy Group Company. 3. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware. B. Bored Locks: BHMA Grade 2; backset: 2-3/4 inches, except 2-3/8 inches acceptable on narrow stile door with approval of the Program Manager. 1. Product: Schlage; Models A-Series as scheduled. 2. Strike: Standard T-strike with curved lip and dust box. Provide extended lip if required by conditions. C. 3 Point Locks: Comply with the following: 1. Product: To match door manufacturer's swinging door Product Approval. Deadlocking latchbolt operated by key outside and turn inside. D. Keying: Key locks alike within each Property(Unit). 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE, GENERAL A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 2 wall stop with bumper, satin chrome over brass. 1. Provide floor stop in conditions where wall stop is not practical. 2.04 FINISHES A. Provide one of the following standard finishes on hinges and locksets. Finish to match prevalent finish in Parcel, or as selected by the Homeowner and approved by the Program Manager. Finish on hinges shall match finish on locksets. B. Exterior Hinges and other hardware: Finishes acceptable for use on exterior doors: 1. Finish: BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal. C. Interior Hinges and other hardware: Finishes acceptable for use on interior doors: 1. Finish: BHMA 646: Satin nickel plated over steel base metal. D. Lockset: Finishes acceptable for use on locksets and deadbolts: 1. Finish: BHMA 619: Satin nickel plated over brass or bronze base metal. 2.05 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS, GENERAL A. Provide gasketing, door bottoms and thresholds identical to the types used in tested acoustic door assemblies, unless otherwise approved by the door manufacturer. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of door hardware. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W series. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Mounting Heights: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Field Fitting: Use jigs to accurately prepare hardware cutouts. Apply two coats sealer at cut outs prior to installation of hardware. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 3.04 INSTALLATION, GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS A. Trim and install gasketing and thresholds carefully to eliminate gaps. Verify tightness by checking for light leaks at entire door perimeter. Adjust or replace as required. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check door and hardware to ensure proper operation. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. B. Lubricate surface of polyethylene covered foam gaskets with silicone lubricant as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -4 3.07 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. DOOR TYPES IW: Interior swinging louvered stile and rail doors: 3 Hinges Std. wt., anti-friction Interior finish 1 Lock Bored, Schlage A-Series Interior finish, lever, passage function B. DOOR TYPE EP: Exterior Swinging Doors: 1 Lock Manufacturer's approved 3-point lock system with lever(egress compliant) 1 Wall Stop Other required hardware By door manufacturer END OF SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5 SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Two coat, portland cement plaster(stucco)finishes. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching". 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies". 3. Division 8 Windows and Doors. 4. Division 9 Section "Painting". 5. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications C. The primary work of this Section is cutting and patching around the installation of new sound control door and window products, blending the new stucco work into the existing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each product specified or intended to be used. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages, containers, or bundles, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name, and lot number. B. Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster application. B. Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of these, as required. PORTLAND CEMENT 09220 - 1 PLASTER C. Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused by plastering. Provide temporary covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc. 2. The Quikrete Companies. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Base-Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory blended, sanded stucco basecoat consisting of Portland cement, lime, properly graded aggregate, alkali resistant fiberglass and acrylic fibers. 1. El Rey Stucco; Fiber-47 Sanded. 2. Quikrete; Quikrete Fiberglass Reinforced Stucco#1200. B. Factory-Prepared Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory-packaged blend of portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or III; hydrated lime, Type S, ASTM C 206 or ASTM C 207; aggregate, ASTM C 897; and compatible with base coat and finish texture indicated. 1. El Rey Stucco; Premium Stucco Finish. 2. Quikrete; Quikrete Finish Coat Stucco#1201. C. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable. D. Bonding Agent: Complying with ASTM C 932, and as recommended by the stucco manufacturer. E. Protection for adjacent aluminum surfaces. 2.03 MIXING A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. B. Frozen, caked or lumpy materials shall not be used and shall be removed from jobsite immediately. C. Accurately proportion materials for each plaster batch with measuring devices of known volume. D. Size batches for complete use within maximum of one hour after mixing. E. Re-temper plaster stiffened from evaporation, but dispose of partially hydrated cement plaster. Do not use excessive water. PORTLAND CEMENT 09220 -2 PLASTER PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING A. Cut back existing plaster to sound material. Undercut edge of existing stucco. B. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work. C. Apply bonding agent on concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application; comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application. D. Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with scratch-coat work. E. Flashing: Refer to Division 7 Sections for installing flashings as indicated. F. Surface Conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces that are indicated for direct plaster application, except where a bonding agent has been applied. Determine and apply amount of moisture and degree of saturation that will result in optimum suction for plastering. 3.02 PLASTER APPLICATION A. Protect all aluminum windows and doors and all existing surfaces with removable tape. B. Apply base and finish coats to match texture of existing stucco. C. Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926 except Table 4. D. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 6-foot straightedge placed at any location on surface. E. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush and true with plaster faces on exterior work. F. Number of Coats: Apply plaster of composition indicated, to comply with the following requirements: 1. Two Coats: Over the following plaster bases: a. Concrete unit masonry. G. Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following requirements: 1. Float Finish: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch to completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with fine-textured finish matching existing conditions. 2. Trowel-Textured Finish: Apply finish coat with hand-troweled-textured finish matching existing conditions. H. Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926 except Table 4, including written instructions for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations." PORTLAND CEMENT 09220 - 3 PLASTER 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work. B. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. END OF SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT 09220 -4 PLASTER SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Non-load-bearing steel framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in gypsum board assemblies. 3. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specs. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. GYPSUM BOARD 09260 - 1 ASSEMBLIES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Dale/Incor. b. Dietrich Metal Framing, Inc. C. National Gypsum Company. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. National Gypsum Company. b. United States Gypsum Co. 2.02 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web)or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs. 2.03 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or non-slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. C. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.04 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Regular Type: a. Thickness: 1/2 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: As indicated. GYPSUM BOARD 09260 -2 ASSEMBLIES 2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. 2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.07 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. C. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 2.08 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements and match existing conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. GYPSUM BOARD 09260 - 3 ASSEMBLIES B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.03 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. B. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. 4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch staples fabricated from 0.0625-inch-diameter tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member. 3.04 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. G. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. GYPSUM BOARD 09260 -4 ASSEMBLIES I. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. J. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 3.05 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.06 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.07 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. 3.08 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. GYPSUM BOARD 09260 - 5 ASSEMBLIES B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture finish manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD 09260 - 6 ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09911 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Program Manager will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. All installed, exposed to view work in the scope of this contract is to be finished. Items not prefinished by manufacturer are to be finished by paint or stain based on material schedules listed in this Section and in Division 9 Section "Exterior Wood Stains". 2. Any installed items not exposed to view are to be back-primed or otherwise finished or primed as required by these Specifications to provide a sound installation of products. C. Do not paint finished metal surfaces and labels. 1. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Galvanized steel. 2. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies". 2. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. PAINTING 09911 - 1 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PAINTING 09911 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore &Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: As selected by Program Manager from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Latex Exterior Primer No. 102: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer A24W300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 2.04 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer& Underbody No. 216: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. PAINTING 09911 - 3 4. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Masonry Primer B28W300 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. B. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory- formulated alkyd-or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody No. 217: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer B28W101 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 2.05 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; MoorLife Latex House Paint No. 105: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 10 Line Pitt-Cryl Exterior Water Base Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 72 Line Sun-Proof Exterior Flat Latex House Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 4. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Latex Flat House and Trim Paint, A80 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2.06 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Regal AquaVelvet No. 319: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 89-Line Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Wall and Trim: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Satin Wall Paint A87 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Program Manager about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. PAINTING 09911 -4 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. C. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. PAINTING 09911 - 5 E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, non-specular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use spray equipment unless approved by the Program Manager. 1. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Sand lightly between each coat of enamel or varnish to remove defects visible from 5 feet away. 3. Apply paints to drywall and plaster surfaces by roller. 4. Apply paints to wood trim and finish carpentry by brush. 5. Apply paints and stains to siding and shingles by brush. 6. Apply paints to doors and frames by brush. PAINTING 09911 - 6 D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. I. Wood Doors: 1. Seal tops, bottoms of wood doors with a coat of primer or sealer immediately after receipt from manufacturer. 2. Before finishing, thoroughly sand surfaces with hand block and 5/0, 180 grit sand paper to remove handling marks and raised grain to prevent blotchy appearance. Sand and finish door in a horizontal position. 3. Immediately after fitting and sanding and before hanging, seal the entire door, including the top and bottom edges, with two coats of paint. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Program Manager. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. PAINTING 09911 - 7 3.06 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco, and brick masonry substrates: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint. 3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. B. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. END OF SECTION 09911 PAINTING 09911 - 8 SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Contractor's mechanical work for this project primarily consists of removing existing residential PTAC system components and replacing them with new split ductless air conditioning systems. In addition new energy recovery ventilators (ERV)will be installed. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15100 HVAC Systems. B. Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. C. Volume 3 of 5 - Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports and Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.03 CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. All Contractors and Subcontractors working on this project shall be licensed by the State of Florida and Monroe County, as applicable. 1.04 CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Furnish all materials, equipment and labor and perform all the operations in connection with the construction and installation of the Division 15 Mechanical Systems described in the Drawings and the Division 15 Specifications herein and according to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. B. Obtain all permits and licenses, and pay all fees as required for execution of the Contract. Arrange for necessary inspections required by the county and other authorities having jurisdiction, and present certificates of approval to the Program Manager. C. All required insurance shall be provided by the Contractor for protection against public liability and property damage for the duration of the project. D. The Contractor shall provide personnel or Subcontractor(s) with the experience, equipment and certified training that will ensure this work provides high quality HVAC systems in a timely and thoroughly professional manner. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all personnel, trades and Subcontractors required for this project and the scheduling of their work to preclude work and space interference between them. F. If interference occurs because equipment installation was not coordinated between Subcontractors, the responsible Subcontractor shall make the necessary changes without extra charges. Provide all temporary utilities as required during the project except those that obviously exceed general practice. MECHANICAL 15010 - 1 GENERAL G. The Contractor shall be responsible for the completed system being in accordance with the Contract Drawings, General Notes and the Specifications in Section 15100 and the Electrical requirements of 16050. H. The Mechanical Drawings are diagrammatic in nature except where specific dimensions, or specific details, are shown. I. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall visit the residences for exact locations of equipment, building dimensions, architectural details and conditions affecting the mechanical work. J. If equal products from qualified manufacturers are offered as a substitution and accepted, the Contractor is responsible for coordinating all the changes that affect the installation and the Subcontractors. K. The Contractor must obtain approval from the Program Manager before executing any deviations from the Drawings and these Specifications. L. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing or replacing any damage done to the new equipment or the Homeowner's residence and its surroundings to the satisfaction of the Program Manager. 1.05 REFERENCES, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. For this project all work shall comply with the latest versions of the 2020 Florida Building Code, 7th Edition - Building, Florida Building Code, 7th Edition — Energy Conservation and Florida Building Code, 7th Edition - Mechanical and with the applicable standards of the following agencies and organizations as specifically referenced in the above codes. 1. NFPA-70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA-90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. 3. NFPA-101, Life Safety Code. 4. Air Distribution Council (ADC). 5. Air Filter Institute (AFI). 6. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 7. Plastic Piping Institute (PPI). 8. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors of America (SMACNA). 9. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 10. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 11. American Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Guarantees for a period of one full year from the date of final acceptance and, where specified, manufacturer's warranties greater than one year shall be provided from the date of final acceptance for all the mechanical equipment and systems installed for this project. Final acceptance means the time that beneficial occupancy has been confirmed in writing to the Contractor. B. The guarantee shall be against defective/failed materials, design, workmanship and system performance. Defective/failed means not up to manufacturer's or design performance. C. Upon receipt of notice from the Program Manager of a defect/failure of any part of the guaranteed equipment, system function or its performance during the guarantee period, the Contractor shall promptly replace the affected part or parts with new parts and make the MECHANICAL 15010 -2 GENERAL necessary adjustments to reset the system performance to that of final acceptance. Promptly shall mean not less than two business days after the Contractor is notified. D. The expense for all parts and equipment, adjustments and labor, including those being provided under the manufacturer's warranty, shall be borne by the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS A. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangements of the mechanical systems. The Specifications and Drawings are considered as supplementary one to the other. Materials and labor indicated and called for or implied by one and not the other shall be supplied and installed as though specifically called for in both. B. Equipment, ductwork and piping arrangement shall fit into the space allocated and provide clearances for servicing and maintenance per the specified codes and standards. Capacities of all equipment shall be not less than those indicated on the Drawings. 2.02 STANDARD PRODUCTS A. The equipment to be furnished under these Specifications shall be new and essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. B. The factory supplied equipment shall use materials, be clad, painted or otherwise prepared to minimize corrosion in the South Florida coastal environment and shall bear permanently readable certificates or seals and maintenance/service or cautionary instruction labels. C. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required under the Specifications, these shall be the products of a single manufacturer. 2.03 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering manufactured equipment or products the Contractor shall submit to the Program Manager six copies of the manufacturer's descriptive literature. 1. The literature shall include but not be limited to model number, descriptive drawings, efficiency ratings, performance data, mechanical specifications, dimensions, weight, controls, control functions, wiring diagrams and installation, startup and checkout instructions, as applicable. 2. Manufactured equipment is defined as but not limited to CU, AHU, Thermostat, Supply Registers, Return Grilles, Filters (ASHRAE Standard 52-76 efficiency rating), Refrigerant Piping, Valves and Fittings, Flexible Ducts, Flexible Connections and Piping and ERV. B. In addition to the above two copies each of the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions for all the proposed equipment and materials. These shall be reviewed to determine if the proposed equipment and material meet the requirements set forth in these Specifications. C. Shop drawings shall also be submitted for the prescribed new CU stands which shall meet minimum FEMA Flood Zone elevation plus 12" and current wind load. D. Copies of data produced by a facsimile machine (FAX) or reproductions of FAX copies shall not be accepted. MECHANICAL 15010 - 3 GENERAL E. Approval of shop drawings is not a guarantee of a detailed check of accuracy or shall it relieve the Contractor's responsibility for performing the work per the Drawings and Specifications. 2.04 DUCTWORK: All ERV ductwork shall be galvanized sheet metal snap-lock ductwork with connectors. The product shall conform to the following standards: UL 181, class 0 air duct. The maximum flame spread index & smoke developed index shall be zero. The product shall have a +/-4" static pressure rating, maximum temperature of 400 Degrees Fahrenheit, & a velocity rating of 5000 fpm. The use of flexible aluminum ductwork shall only be allowed within ceiling structure when approved by the program manager. 2.05 INSULATION MATERIALS: All insulation materials including vapor barriers, jackets and adhesives for mechanical systems shall be UL rated in accordance with NFPA. 90A and have a Flame Spread Rating not exceeding 25 and a Smoke Developed Rating not exceeding 50 when tested in accordance with NFPA 255 "Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics Building Materials". Submittal data for materials shall specifically indicate those ratings. 2.06 DOMESTIC PRODUCTS: All piping and fittings shall be fabricated in the United States of America and submittals and product shall be labeled accordingly. Foreign produced pipe and fittings shall not be accepted. 2.07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: All equipment and piping supports shall be hot dipped galvanized except as otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. Vinyl coated hangers are required for copper pipe. Copper clad hangers cannot be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Work shall start as soon as possible. The Contractor shall ensure that all work is performed in a workman like manner. B. Work lines and established grades shall be in strict accordance with the Drawings. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing to all trades, in ample time, information needed to construct all bases, soffits, chases and openings in ceilings, walls and finishes and to provide clearances for the work. The contractor shall set all sleeves, anchor bolts or inserts required to fasten equipment before adjacent concrete is poured. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the actions of his employees and for compliance with all laws and ordinances governing the work. They shall layout the work and establish elevations in strict accordance with the Drawings, be responsible for the accuracy of the laying out, and give personal supervision to the work. The contractor shall have at all times a competent Representative on the premises who shall be acceptable to the Program Manager. D. A continuous cleanup shall be maintained during the progress of the work and appointed storage areas shall be used for surplus materials and supplies. The premises shall be kept free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish; and, at completion, the refuse shall be removed from the site. 3.02 INTERFERENCES A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor shall harmonize the work of the different trades so that interference between piping, ductwork, equipment and structural work MECHANICAL 15010 -4 GENERAL shall be avoided. The Contractor cannot order equipment or fabricate system components until he has coordinated all of his work with other trades. He shall bring to the attention of the Program Manager any apparent conflicts for resolution before commencing with installation. B. All required offsets, fittings, etc., shall be furnished and installed without additional expense to the Sponsor. In cases of interference, the Program Manager shall decide which equipment shall be relocated, regardless of which apparatus was first installed. C. Piping, ducts, etc., shall be kept as close as possible to ceilings, walls, columns, etc., so as to take the minimum amount of space. Ducts and soffits shall be kept as high as possible. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the referenced standards, and with the contract documents. B. Workers skilled in the type of work involved shall do the installation. Workers shall have current certifications, when required, for a particular trade. The installation procedures and the completed installation shall be subject to the approval of the Program Manager. 3.04 DRAWINGS: The Contractor shall keep two sets of Drawings on the job for keeping a neat, red pencil marked record of day-to-day changes in location of piping, fixtures, and other items. Upon completion of the project sign both copies, certify them as being, actual as-built conditions. Provide one to the Program Manager and incorporate these changes on clean copies of the original Drawings. Provide this clean copy"as-built" drawing to the Program Manager. 3.05 CONTRACTORS' DIFFERENCES: If the Contractor proposes to deviate from Specifications or Drawings, he shall call attention to them in his proposal otherwise it shall be assumed that he accepts and agrees to follow the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The Program Manager shall approve in advance deviations from Construction Documents during construction. 3.06 VIBRATIONS AND NOISE CONTROL: Excessive vibrations or objectionable noise created in any part of the building by operation of any equipment installed under this Contract shall not be permitted. Contractor shall isolate various items of equipment from building structure and take all steps that may be necessary to eliminate excessive vibration and objectionable noise produced by any equipment installed under this Contract. 3.07 DEMOLITION A. Perform and coordinate all demolition of systems and equipment as specified in the Drawings. Non-destructively remove systems, materials and equipment that are either re- usable or salvageable. B. Coordinate the on-site storage of abandoned equipment and materials until it is removed from the site. Remove and legally dispose of these items and manage the truck traffic required for this disposal. 3.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels and similar information needed for distinct identification and adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipping, storage and handling. B. Store equipment and materials off-site. On-site storage authorized for materials incorporated in work on a daily basis. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. MECHANICAL 15010 - 5 GENERAL C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installation. 3.09 EXECUTION A. DUCTS AND REFRIGERANT PIPING 1. Cap and protect all open ducts and refrigerant piping at the end of the day to prevent collecting dust and foreign material in them before they are ready for use. 2. Construct ductwork for Class 1"wg: however, seal all ducts to be air-tight. Tape all joints in new ducts. Tighten and tape loose connections in existing ducts. 3. Flexible duct connections shall be not less than 6 feet nor more than 10 feet in length and provided with manufacturers connector. Flexible duct connections and tape and sealant shall be that recommended by the duct manufacturer. 4. All exposed duct and piping insulation joints shall be taped. Seal all seams and joints in vapor barrier of ductwork insulation with an approved closure system such as mastic or UL181 A or B listed tape. Extend closed cell insulation over all refrigerant piping with no gaps and seal all transverse and longitudinal insulation seams in a manner adequate to stop condensation in or above finished space. 5. 3.10 PIPE SLEEVES A. Pipe sleeves shall be provided where pipes and tubing pass through masonry or concrete walls, ceilings, roofs and partitions. Those in outside walls and above grade shall be zinc- coated steel or PVC pipe. B. Sleeves in partitions shall be zinc-coated sheet steel having a nominal weight of not less than 0.906 pound per square foot. Plastic sleeves, Schedule 40 PVC, may be used when approved by the Program Manager. C. Space between pipe, tubing, or insulation and the sleeve cannot be less than one-quarter inch. Space between the pipe or tubing and the sleeve shall be firmly packed with oakum and caulked on both ends of the sleeve with insulating cement. 3.11 PIPE SUPPORTS A. All refrigerant and condensate piping shall be anchored and supported in a manner that permits expansion in the desired direction and strain on equipment shall be prevented. The maximum pipe support spacing shall conform to Table 1 below. 1. Wall brackets can be used where pipes are adjacent to walls. 2. Insulated piping shall have a covering protection saddle at each support. Pipe supports spacing shall provide adequate support for the weight of the pipes, the medium in the pipe, insulation, valves, and fittings, and to prevent the formation of pockets. 3. Approved bolted steel clamps spaced at not more than 15 feet apart shall support all vertical piping. MECHANICAL 15010 - 6 GENERAL TABLE 1 PIPE HANGER SPACING MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING PIPE NOM. STEEL PIPE COPPER TYPE "U HANGER DIAMETER ROD SIZE (INCHES) (FT) (FT) (INCHES) 1/2 7 5 1/4 3/4 7 5 3/8 1 7 6 3/8 1-1/2 9 6 3/8 3.12 CORROSION A. Provisions shall be made to prevent corrosion due to contact of metallic pipe and equipment with dissimilar materials. 1. When a pipe is joined to another pipe, valve, fitting, or piece of equipment constructed of dissimilar metal, an insulated joint shall be installed to prevent the formation of a galvanic couple. 2. Pipe hangers and supports of dissimilar metal shall be isolated from contact with the pipe. 3. Metal pipe and equipment shall be isolated from direct contact with concrete or other corrosive materials or soils. 3.13 TESTS: All materials, equipment and systems that are required to be tested by these Specifications or by any applicable regulation: A. Tests shall be completed before the equipment is concealed from view. B. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and equipment used for tests. C. Tests shall be done in the presence of the Program Manager and, as required, the authority having jurisdiction. D. All defects disclosed by the tests shall be rectified and the test repeated. The Program Manager and, as required, the authority having jurisdiction before execution shall approve the extent of the repairs. E. After successful leak tests and before final connections, forcefully blow out the ducts and refrigerant piping until there is no evidence of dust and or particles in the exit air stream. This shall be done in the presence of the Program Manager. F. When system is fully installed and refrigerant piping is charged perform start up tests per manufacturer's instructions. Next, perform "rough" settings of fan speeds and register settings. 3.14 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Mechanical equipment shall have factory finish as specified and any damage to that finish shall be field primed and painted to match existing. MECHANICAL 15010 - 7 GENERAL B. All exposed metal surfaces that are not factory finished shall be painted. 1. All ferrous metal equipment and supports not factory finished shall be cleaned, primed with a suitable primer and given two finish coats exterior enamel. 2. Exposed galvanized metal, including ducts, shall be primed with galvanized metal primer, and painted with enamel paint to match surrounding area. 3. Other unpainted ferrous metal including all pipe sleeves or equipment supports shall be cleaned and primed with a suitable metal primer and then painted with two coats, one of flat and one of enamel. 4. All visible unpainted equipment and piping after insulation has been installed shall be primed and painted with one color flat coat and one color enamel paint, the color to be selected by the Program Manager. 3.15 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: All equipment shall be identified with names or usage, painted or tagged on the outside of equipment. All valves shall be tagged. Piping and ducting shall be identified and direction of flow noted. 3.16 CLEANING UP A. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the personnel or Subcontractor responsible for producing rubbish shall remove it as fast as it accumulates. B. Upon completion of work the Contractor shall responsible for overseeing that all personnel and Subcontractors remove from the site all tools, equipment, surplus materials and rubbish pertaining to their operations. 3.17 SPARE PARTS: Provide the Homeowner with one spare set of filters. 3.18 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall prepare for the Homeowner one copy of operation and maintenance manuals for all the system's equipment. B. Manuals shall include manufacturer's data books, parts list, wiring diagrams, maintenance procedures and schedules, and start up/shut down instructions. C. The Contractor shall also provide a minimum of one hour operating and maintenance instruction to the Homeowners where HVAC equipment did not replace similar equipment. A minimum of 1/2 hour of similar instruction shall be provided to the Homeowners where HVAC equipment replaced similar equipment. END OF SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL 15010 - 8 GENERAL SECTION 15100 HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 OVERVIEW A. The HVAC system installation is part of a project that also modifies the envelope of the residences to effect sound insulation. B. New factory supplied HVAC units, ERV units, air distribution devices, piping and electrical wiring will be installed. C. Package terminal air conditioning (PTAC) units will be removed and replaced by ductless HVAC systems. 1.02 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment and labor and perform all the operations and scheduling in connection with the construction and installation of the HVAC systems described in the Drawings and in this Specification and according to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all the required permits, coordinating all the subcontractors and for providing the completed HVAC system and components in accordance with the Drawings and this Specification. C. The Contractor must obtain approval from the Program Manager before executing any deviations from the Drawings and this Specification. 1.03 REFERENCES, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. All work shall comply with the 2020 Florida Building Code, 7th edition - Mechanical and the codes and standards of these agencies and organizations and as specifically referenced therein and hereinafter: 1. Air Distribution Council (ADC) Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards. 2. Air Movements and Control Association (AMCA). 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration &Air Conditioning (ASHRAE). ANSI/ASHRAE 15, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 4. FEMA Flood Zone Standard. 5. NFPA 90 A & B, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. 6. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. (SMACNA). 7. UL 181; UL181 A Parts I, II and II; UL 181 B Parts I and II. B. In addition to the above, these modified residences are subject to the requirements of the 2020 Florida Building Code, 7th edition — Energy Conservation. The envelope modifications HVAC 15100-1 SYSTEMS and the HVAC system are subject to the prescriptive requirements of form R402-2020 in this code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 System Description: A. The heat pump air conditioning system shall be a variable capacity multi-zone system. The system shall consist of two (2), three (3), or four (4) slim silhouette, compact, wall mounted indoor fan coil sections with digital wireless remote controller connected to a compact horizontal discharge outdoor unit which shall be of an inverter driven heat pump design. B. Product Warranty: The product manufacturer shall warrant the product against defects in material and workmanship for a period equal to the manufacturer's standard warranty term for the manufactured item but not less than a warranty period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall be non-prorated. The warranty shall state that the product manufacturer shall provide all materials required to repair or replace defective materials or workmanship. C. Manufacturer shall have over 20 years of continuous experience in the U.S. market. 2.02 Quality Assurance: A. The system components shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and shall bear the ETL label. B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.). C. The units shall be rated in accordance with Air-conditioning Refrigeration Institute's (ARI) Standard 240 and bear the ARI Certification label. D. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO 14001, which is a set of standards applying to product and manufacturing quality and environmental management and protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). 2.03 CONDENSING UNITS A. The condensing unit shall be a factory fabricated, unitary, air-cooled, horizontal discharge type. B. Fan: 1. The unit shall be furnished with a direct drive, high performance propeller type fan. 2. The condenser fan motor shall be a variable speed, direct current (DC) motor and shall have permanently lubricated bearings. 3. Fan speed shall be switch automatically according to the number of operating indoor units and the compressor operating frequency. 4. The fan motor shall be mounted with vibration isolation for quiet operation. 5. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. 6. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. C. Coil: 1. The outdoor unit coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The coil shall be protected with an integral guard. 3. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit to the indoor units shall be independently controlled by means of individual electronic linear expansion valves for each indoor unit. HVAC 15100-2 SYSTEMS 4. Outdoor unit shall be pre-charged with sufficient R-410a refrigerant for up to one hundred and thirty-one (131)feet of refrigerant piping. 5. All refrigerant lines between outdoor and indoor units shall be of annealed, refrigeration grade copper tubing, ACR Type, meeting ASTM B280 requirements, individually insulated in twin-tube, flexible, closed-cell, CFC-free (ozone depletion potential of zero), elastomeric material for the insulation of refrigerant pipes and tubes with thermal conductivity equal to or better than 0.27 BTU-inch/hour per Sq Ft / °F, a water vapor transmission equal to or better than 0.08 Perm-inch and superior fire ratings such that insulation will not contribute significantly to fire and up to 1" thick insulation shall have a Flame-Spread Index of less than 25 and a Smoke-development Index of less than 50 as tested by ASTM E 84 and CAN/ ULC S-102. 6. All refrigerant connections between outdoor and indoor units shall be flare type. D. Compressor: 1. The compressor shall be a high performance, hermetic, inverter driven, variable speed, dual rotary type. 2. The compressor motor shall be direct current (DC) type equipped with a factory supplied and installed inverter drive package. 3. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with a suction side refrigerant accumulator. 4. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload. 5. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. 2.05 DUCTWORK A. Duct dimensions shown on the Drawings are for round duct, free and clear interior dimensions. Equivalent rectangular dimensions are acceptable. B. Horizontal ductwork shall be run above the ceiling in the structure. Vertical ductwork that is not in an air handler closet or in the attic shall be in a soffit. 2.06 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Air distribution devices shall be white. Their design shall be listed as meeting the applicable standards to deliver the air-flow and patterns indicated on the Drawings and described in this Specification. B. The devices noise parameters shall be listed as meeting the test standards of ANSI/ASHRAE 70 and ANSI S1.31. These devices shall be selected according to the following noise criteria: 1. For Bedrooms: Not greater than NC 25. 2. All Other: Not greater than NC 35. C. Ceiling supply diffusers shall be equipped with flow volume control dampers and adjustable, curved blades accessible from the face. A. Wall registers shall be equipped with volume control dampers and adjustable vertical and horizontal flow pattern blades accessible from the face. B. Return grilles shall be sized as shown on the Drawings and be equipped for a replaceable filter. 2.07 FILTERS HVAC 15100-3 SYSTEMS A. The air handler filter media shall be a factory supplied, semi-permanent type. 2.08 REFRIGERANT PIPE A. Refrigerant lines shall be run up the inside of the building to the ceiling to the air handler. All vertical refrigerant lines shall be enclosed in soffits. B. All refrigerant lines between outdoor and indoor units shall be of annealed, refrigeration grade copper tubing, ACR Type, meeting ASTM B280 requirements. Suction & liquid lines shall be insulated. 2.09 CONDENSATE PIPE A. The condensate pipe shall be run to the outdoors through the exterior wall where shown on the drawings. Its material shall be sch 40 PVC for gravity drain &type "M" copper tubing for the condensate pump discharge. 2.10 INSULATION A. Condensate, Suction & liquid refrigerant lines shall be insulated. The insulation shall be jacketed with a vapor barrier, conform to the applicable codes and be UL 181 rated in accordance with NFPA. 90A. B. For 1 inch and less refrigerant & condensate pipes the insulation shall be 'h inch thick foamed plastic"Armstrong"Armaflex or equal, "K" value = 0.27 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING EQUIPMENT& DUCTWORK A. Where new equipment is scheduled on the Drawings, remove the existing PTAC units and close the PTAC unit wall holes. 3.02 NEW EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Ductless HVAC units shall be installed per the manufacturer's instructions. B. All motors and equipment shall be set, leveled, plumbed and aligned by craftsmen skilled in their labor trade. All equipment shall be wedged or shimmed into place and tested before being permanently anchored. All equipment shall be anchored as recommended by the manufacturer. C. The Air Handling unit shall be installed to a height as required that is open to permit return air flow into it. It shall be positioned to provide the clearances to walls and other equipment as specified by the manufacturer. It shall be oriented to provide easy access for maintenance of its filter and to its electrical disconnect. D. The Condensing Unit shall be installed on a platform meeting the height above grade requirements and secured to resist the wind loads, FEMA Standard, and local codes. E. The jacketed exterior refrigerant piping shall be secured to resist the wind loads, FEMA Standard, and local codes. F. Provide to Property Owner the operating and maintenance manual and instruct the Property Owner in scheduling and executing the air handler filter cleaning and replacing the return grille filter. HVAC 15100-4 SYSTEMS 3.03 AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Ductwork shall be constructed and erected in a first class workmanlike manner in conformance with the applicable SMACNA Standards. Ducts shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings, and shall be straight with joints neatly finished and sealed. B. Ducts shall be securely anchored to the building in an approved manner, and shall be installed so as to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of operation. C. The Program Manager shall approve before fabrication any changes necessary to clear obstructions. 3.04 TESTS A. Refrigerant Pipe-Joint Test: 1. All refrigerant piping shall be pneumatically tested with dry nitrogen and proved tight by swabbing with a soap solution. The high side of each refrigeration system shall be tested at 300 psi minimum and the low side at 150 psi minimum. 2. Any joints or piping that show leakage shall be taken apart, thoroughly cleaned, remade as new piping or joints and retested with dry nitrogen pressure and soap solution swabbing. 3. If it passes the dry nitrogen test, fully recharge the system with refrigerant and perform a final test of the system with a halide torch or electronic leak detector. 3.05 INSULATION A. Insulation shall not be installed until after piping and ductwork have passed the Leak Tight Tests. Surfaces shall be cleaned and dry before applying insulation or coatings. Workers skilled in the trade shall apply insulation and coatings. B. Refrigerant pipe insulation shall be slipped on the pipe prior to connection and butt joints shall be sealed with approved adhesive. Where necessary, slit insulation and apply to pipe, seal seam with adhesive. Insulation exposed to weather shall be painted as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.06 CLEANING AND PREPARATION A. Ducts, plenums and casing shall be thoroughly cleaned of all debris and blown free of all small particles of rubbish and dust before installing outlet faces. Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt or paint spots removed. B. Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans that are operated during construction and, after all construction dirt has been removed from the building, new filters shall be installed. C. Bearings shall be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to proper tension. D. All control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to the setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions. E. All exposed metal surfaces shall be painted. Air conditioning equipment shall have factory finish, and any damage to that finish shall be field painted to match the existing finish. All HVAC 15100-5 SYSTEMS ferrous metal, equipment and supports not factory finished shall be cleaned, primed with a suitable primer and given two finish coats of exterior enamel. END OF SECTION 15100 HVAC 15100-6 SYSTEMS SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This Section includes: A. Secondary electrical service. B. Electrical power work. C. Neutral grounding system. D. Equipment grounding system. E. Excavation and backfill for electrical conduit installation. F. Electrical demolition. G. Tests of electrical systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15010, Mechanical General Provisions. B. Section 15100, HVAC Systems. C. Volume 3 of 5-Asbestos & Lead Based Paint Test Reports &Asbestos Remediation Specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements and Standards: Comply with 2020 Florida Building Code,7th Edition— Building (National Electrical Code, 2017 NEC) and applicable requirements of the following codes and standards as therein referenced: 1. Local, state, and federal codes and ordinances. 2. National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C-2). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 5. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101). 6. National Fire Protection Association Fire Codes (NFPA). 7. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU). 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 9. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). B. Except as otherwise indicated, electrical material and components shall be listed or labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or by a similar recognized testing organization. Listing or labeling shall include suitability for the use intended on this project. C. Single Source Responsibility: Same types of materials and components shall be the product of one manufacturer. ELECTRICAL 16050-1 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitution of materials shall be requested in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers technical product literature,including specifications and installation instructions for each component and system as listed in Products, Part 2, of each Section. B. Coordination Drawings: Detailed layout drawings showing primary elements, components and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. 1. Indicate clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment. 2. Indicate locations where space is limited and sequencing and coordination will affect efficient installation of the Work. C. Project Record Documents: Submit in accordance with General Conditions and Division 1 at time of Substantial Completion. Include marked up as-built drawings indicating proper circuit numbers, conduit homeruns, branch conduit runs, and other such pertinent data. D. Operational and Maintenance Manuals: Three copies shall be submitted at time of Final Completion in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices, conduit, and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive delivery of, store, and handle materials in such a manner to ensure that the materials remain in like new condition and in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1. 1.08 FIELD INSPECTION A. Verify existing conditions before installation in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1. ELECTRICAL 16050-2 1.09 PERMITS AND FEES A. Secure and pay for all permits and inspections for required electrical work. Turn over all certificates of approval by governing agencies to the Program Manager before final payment for work is made. B. Provide the proper authorities notices as required by law. Complywith the regulations regarding temporary enclosures, obstructions, or excavations. Pay all legal fees involved. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee all work and materials provided under this contract for one (1) year after final acceptance by the Program Manager. Repair or replace without additional cost to the Contract any defect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOAD CENTERS A. Characteristics: Types as indicated or scheduled, service entrance rated and bus ratings as indicated. Provide a typewritten circuit directory on the inside of the door. Provide panels either 22,000 A.I.C. series rated or fully rated. B. Provide surface mounted NEMA 3R or NEMA 1 as indicated. Provide flush or surface mounted as required for indoor panel locations. C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB, plug-on thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers,with common trip handle for all poles. Provide ground fault interrupter circuit breakers in installations where existing panels are being replaced and existing panels have such breakers. Where circuit breakers are being added to existing panels which are not being replaced,such circuit breakers shall be of the same manufacturer as the manufacturer of the panel in which they are being installed in and shall be so listed for such installation by the manufacturer. D. Source Manufacturers: 1. Westinghouse/Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. Square D. 2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND MOLDED CASE SWITCHES A. Characteristics: Molded case type of overcurrent trip rating, number of poles, voltage, and interrupting capacity as indicated. Minimum interrupting capacity of22,000AIC unless otherwise noted. B. Circuit breakers used for overcurrent protection of refrigeration or air conditioning equipment shall be HACR rated. C. Enclosed molded case switches shall comply with the above except they shall not have overcurrent trip capability. D. Source Manufacturers: 1. Westinghouse/Cutler-Hammer. ELECTRICAL 16050-3 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. Square D. 2.03 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Characteristics: General or heavy duty, fusible or nonfusible as indicated or required, quick make, quick break; horsepower rated. Switches shall be of number of poles, amps, and volts indicated. Switch nameplate shall indicate switch type,catalog number,and horsepower ratings. Switch handles shall be capable of being locked in the "OFF" position. B. Source Manufacturers: 1. Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse. 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. Square D. 2.04 FUSES A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: UL 248, Class RK1 or RK5; as indicated on Drawings; current limiting, one-time fuse, 250 volt. Nominal interrupting rating: 100,000 rms amperes. B. Source Manufacturers: 1. Gould Shawmut. 2. Bussmann. 3. Littelfuse. 4. Reliance Fuse. 2.05 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Metal Conduit-Galvanized Steel(RMC-GS): Hotdipped galvanized,ANSI Standard C80.1, Federal Specification WW-C-581, and Underwriters' Laboratories Standard UL6. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): ANSI Standard C80.3, Federal Specification WW-C-563, and Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 797. C. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC-PVC): Polyvinylchloride, Schedule 40 or 80 as indicated, NEMA Standard TC-2 and UL Standard 651. D. Flexible Metal Conduit(FMC): Federal Specification WW-C-566 and Underwriters'Laboratories Standard UL-1. E. Flexible Metal Conduit Liquid Tight (FMC-LT): Steel, galvanized inside and outside, with continuous copper ground and moisture and oil proof extruded PVC jacket. F. Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit Liquid Tight (FNC-LT): Polyvinylchloride with a rigid PVC spiral completely surrounded by flexible PVC. Conduit and fittings shall be UL listed. G. Wireways: National Electrical Code Article 362 and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. ELECTRICAL 16050-4 H. Surface Metal Raceway: National Electrical Code Article 352 Part A and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. I. Auxiliary Gutters: National Electrical Code Article 374 and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. J. Raceway Fittings: Designed for use with the type of raceways on which they are installed, and for the types of environments in which the raceways are located. 2.06 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. Boxes on interior covered conduit systems: Galvanized steel of the type,shape,size and depth to suit each respective location, minimum 1-1/2 in. deep and of size to accommodate devices noted. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting boxes. B. Device boxes on interior exposed conduit systems: Type FS or FD with external threaded hubs, cast aluminum or galvanized malleable iron, suitable for the wiring devices to be installed. C. Covers: Cast aluminum or galvanized malleable iron,designed for the wiring devices and boxes to be installed. D. Weatherproof covers: Provide for boxes in damp and wet locations, installed with gaskets and stainless steel fasteners. E. In wet locations, conduits entering sheet metal equipment enclosures shall terminate with gasketed hubs. Source Manufacturers: 1. Myers. 2. Crouse-Hinds. 3. Efcor. 2.07 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Characteristics: Aluminum, galvanized steel, or galvanized malleable iron boxes unless otherwise indicated,of the size required by Article 370 of NEC for the number,size, and position of conduits and conductors entering the box. Provide full access screw covers, for surface or flush installation, mounted with corrosion resistant machine screws. 1. Where intermediate cable supports are necessary because of box dimensions, provide reinforced flange and removable#12 gauge galvanized channels for supports of conductors. ELECTRICAL 16050-5 B. Characteristics: PVC or reinforced glass fiber composition of the size required by NEC-370 for the number,size, and position of conduits and conductors entering the box. Provide full access screw covers,for surface or flush installation, mounted with corrosion resistant machine screws. Provide grounding lug. 2.08 POWER, LIGHTING, GROUNDING, AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS A. Material: Copper unless otherwise indicated. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. Except where used for grounding, conductors#8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. B. Sizes: 1. Power, lighting,and grounding conductors shall not be smaller than#12 AWG unless noted. 2. Except where otherwise indicated, control conductors shall not be smaller than#14 AWG. C. 600 volt insulated conductors for general use in raceways: Type THWN/THHN. D. All wiring shall be in conduit. E. Interior exposed wiring shall be installed in conduit, type EMT per NEC 358. Interior concealed conduit shall be type FMC or metal clad cable. Exterior wiring shall be in conduit. Exposed conduit shall be pvc sch 80. Liquid tight flex conduit may be used for final equipment connections outside. F. Mechanical Splices: 1. For conductors larger than #10 AWG: Compression type. 2. For conductors#10 AWG and smaller: Wire-nut type spring connectors. G. Taps: Power distribution blocks for multiple tapping from feeders. Base shall provide mounting and insulating properties. ILSCO type PDB or Square D type LBA or type LBC. 2.10 WIRING DEVICES AND COVER PLATES A. Characteristics - Straight blade and locking receptacles: Federal Specification W-C-596 and NEMA Standard WD-1, or where applicable for weatherproof rating, NEMA WD-5; ivory color where ivory is manufactured. Receptacles shall be the NEMA standard blade configurations indicated or NEMA 5-15R where no configuration is shown. Source Product/Manufacturer: 1. 15 ampere 125 volt single receptacle,2 pole 3 wire grounding straight blade(single NEMA 5- 15R): Arrow-Hart#5261 I. 2. 15 ampere 125 volt duplex receptacle,2 pole 3 wire grounding straight blade (duplex NEMA 5-15R): Arrow-Hart#52621. 3. 15 ampere 250 volt single receptacle,2 pole 3 wire grounding straight blade(single NEMA 6- 15R): Arrow-Hart#56511. 4. 20 ampere 125 volt single receptacle,2 pole 3 wire grounding straight blade(single NEMA 5- 20R): Arrow-Hart#53611. 5. 20 ampere 125 volt duplex receptacle,2 pole 3 wire grounding straight blade (duplex NEMA 5-20R): Arrow-Hart#53621. 6. 20 ampere 125 volt feed through ground fault circuit interrupter duplex receptacle, 2 pole 3 wire grounding straight blade (GFCI duplex NEMA 5-20R): Hubbell#GF-5362-1. 7. 20 ampere 250 volt single receptacle,2 pole 3 wire grounding straight blade(single NEMA 6- 20R): Arrow-Hart#53611. 8. Special purpose receptacles shall be as indicated on the drawings. A mating plug shall be furnished to the Owner for each special purpose receptacle provided. ELECTRICAL 16050-6 B. Characteristics-Toggle Switches: Federal Specification W-S-896,NEMA Standard WD-1 where applicable, ivory handles,where ivory is manufactured, rated for 120V ac,with grounding screw, and shall have the same current rating as the branch circuit to which they are connected and be the configurations indicated. Source Product/Manufacturers: 1. 15 ampere single pole: Arrow-Hart#1891 I. 2. 20 ampere single pole: Arrow-Hart#1991 I. 3. 30 ampere single pole: Arrow-Hart#3991 I. 4. 30 ampere 2 pole: Arrow-Hart#39921. 5. Special purpose toggle switches shall be as indicated on the Drawings. C. Characteristics - Flush Cover Plates: Appropriate type and size for the boxes and devices installed; plastic. Plates for use with devices in exposed masonry construction shall be sized to cover the masonry opening. D. Characteristics-Surface Mounted Device Box Covers: As indicated on the Drawings. Covers for Type FS/FD boxes shall be the four-corner screw type. Covers in damp and wet locations shall be polycarbonate or cast metal, with gaskets and stainless steel hardware. E. Source Product/Manufacturers designated above are specified as standards of quality. The following Source Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Arrow-Hart. 2. Bell. 3. Bryant. 4. Eagle. 5. General Electric. 6. Hubbell. 7. Leviton. 8. Pass &Seymour. 9. Slater. 10. Sylvania. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LOAD CENTERS A. Install load centers in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate the installation of load centers with raceway installation work. Anchor enclosures securely to walls and other structural surfaces. 3.02 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND PAINTING A. Cut and patch the building as required to install sleeves, inserts, conduits, and electrical equipment. Patching shall be done by mechanics skilled in the various trades. Work shall match the general construction work. All cutting shall be done in a manner to retain the structural integrity of the unit being cut. Where existing equipment is removed, patch to match the existing building finishes. Provide airtight patch on all new openings between conditioned space and any unconditioned spaces. B. Paint all patched surfaces to match the paint color in the immediate area in accordance with Division 9 requirements. ELECTRICAL 16050-7 3.03 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Except where otherwise indicated, provide raceways for each electrical system with fittings, components, and accessories necessary to form a complete raceway system. B. Conduits shall be concealed in finished spaces unless otherwise indicated. Run exposed conduits parallel to and at right angles to building lines and support at proper intervals. C. Make field bends in conduits with benders designed for the purpose. D. Attach conduit support devices to structure with toggle bolts on hollow masonry; lead shields on solid masonry; and machine bolts, beam clamps,or spring steel clips on steel. Use plated steel threaded rods for suspended conduit hangers. Nails, perforated straps, and tie wires will not be accepted. E. Conduits above suspended ceilings shall be supported from the building structure, not by the suspended ceiling. G. Install conduits penetrating fire rated ceilings, walls or floors with UL approved methods, materials, and devices to maintain the fire rating integrity of the structure penetrated. Referto UL Building Materials Directory for firestop systems and listed materials. H. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections and for other electrical equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration. Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in areas subjected to moisture, corrosive atmosphere and dripping oil or grease, in addition to movement and vibration. I. Provide conduit expansion and deflection fittings where indicated or, if not indicated, where recommended by the conduit manufacturer for the environmental conditions in which the conduit is installed. J. Use double locknuts and insulated bushings for conduit connections to boxes and enclosures. Metallic conduit systems shall provide continuous grounding. K. Install wireways, auxiliary gutters, and surface metal raceways using fasteners and fittings designed for the purpose. L. Clean raceway interiors after installation is completed. Provide pull wires in empty, spare, and future use conduits and seal conduit ends with substantial caps or plugs and marked for identification. 3.04 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. Install boxes of size required by Article 370 of the NEC for the number and size of conductors installed. Sheet metal boxes shall be installed only in dry, concealed accessible locations and not below grade in outside concrete or masonry walls,or in floor slabs subject to moisture,where vapor tight fixtures are required, or for any outdoor use. 3.05 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Install junction and pull boxes where indicated and where necessary to terminate, tap off, or redirect multiple conduit runs, of size indicated or as required by NEC. B. Where feeder splices are to be made, install boxes large enough to provide ample work space. C' Rurnnrt hnYac inriananriantlgnftha rnnriiiitc antarinp therm Plara hnYac in arraccihla Inratinnc ELECTRICAL 16050-8 3.06 CONDUCTORS A. Do not install conductors and pullwires in raceways until the raceway systems have been completed and cleaned. Exercise care when installing conductors to prevent damage to conductor or insulation. Use only approved cable pulling lubricants. B. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet without splices except within wireways or junction boxes. Mark conductors in panels, pull boxes or wireways and terminal strip terminals for identification of circuits. 1. Conductors shall be joined using compression splices, except that conductors #10 and smaller may be joined using wire nut type connectors. Conductors shall be terminated using compression or pressure type terminal lugs, or in pressure terminals. 2. Conductors shall be tapped using pressure type power distribution blocks. 3. Compression splices used on conductors#10 AWG and smaller shall be the self insulated type; other splices shall be insulated using 3M plastic tape. 4. Splices in wet locations shall be insulated with electrical tape and encapsulated with Scotchcast or equal potting compound. 3.07 WIRING DEVICES AND COVER PLATES A. Install wiring devices of the type,size, voltage and number of wires indicated. Devices shall be grounded. Mount devices within recessed boxes to allow flush plates to be in contact with wall on all sides, without the use of mats or plaster filling. B. Install single throw toggle switches with the ON toggle position up. C. Install multiple switches, receptacles, or combinations installed in the same location in multiple gang boxes; do not install dual or triple switches or combination single gang devices except where specifically indicated. D. Provide device plates of one piece, single or multigang type, selected to match the device or combination of devices. E. Unless otherwise dimensioned or noted, mount devices to match similar devices in the residence. 3.08 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install disconnect switches, i.e., safety switches and enclosed molded case circuit breakers where required by Code or where indicated. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices. C. Coordinate the installation with raceway installation work. Anchor securely to walls and other structural surfaces. D. Provide disconnect switches of voltage, current and horsepower (where required) ratings per NEC requirements. ELECTRICAL 16050-9 3.09 FUSES A. Install fuses of the type designed for the fuse holders. Where fuses are required by the equipment manufacturer to protect the equipment, they shall be installed to comply with the manufacturer's requirements. Replace all fuses blown during construction without additional cost to the Project. 3.10 GROUNDING A. Installation of system neutral grounding shall complywith the requirements of Article 250 of NEC. B. In addition to the equipment grounding requirements of Article 250 of NEC, install copper wire grounding conductors in all flexible conduits,feeder conduits,wireways,auxiliary gutters,surface metal raceways, other than services. C. Where equipment grounding conductor is bonded to equipment, remove insulating paint and other compounds from under the ground lugs. D. Do not use mounting connections for bonding equipment grounding conductors. 3.11 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures installed for panels,safety switches,and similar equipment shall be NEMA Type 1 for dry locations and NEMA Type 3R for damp or wet locations unless otherwise noted. 3.12 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Install conductor identification markers on conductors at terminations and in junction and pull boxes through which the conductors pass. Color code power conductors by insulation or tape and identify by markers in junction and pull boxes to indicate the conductors' panel and circuit number. Identify control conductors by markers at all locations. B. Identification markers which are not preprinted, such as panel indexes and special cable markers, shall be typewritten or otherwise mechanically printed, not hand lettered. 3.13 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION A. Examine existing conditions. Report discrepancies to Program Manager before starting work. Existing conditions are accepted after work commences. B. Coordinate electrical outages with utility company & Program Manager. C. Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. D. Remove, relocate,and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction,including wiring devices. E. Remove exposed abandoned conduit including conduit above accessible ceilings. Cut conduit flush with walls or floors, and patch surfaces. F. Repair adjacent finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. ELECTRICAL 16050-10 3.14 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Repair any existing equipment damaged during demolition or construction. B. Clean and remove from the residence all debris daily. C. Clean all equipment at completion of work, and leave in working. D. On all panels, clean interiors and exteriors. Check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers. Provide closure plates for vacant spaces. Provide typed circuit directory with revised circuiting. 3.15 TESTS A. After each system is completed, perform functional tests to demonstrate that the system operates in accordance with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. The tests shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Program Manager. END OF SECTION 16050 ELECTRICAL 16050-11